JP6540736B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the pachinko game machine which is one of the game machines, a back mechanism board on which a payout device and various control boards are mounted is attached to a frame member holding a game board provided with a game area where a game ball is played by a game ball Configured Then, in the process of dropping the game ball hit above the game area by the firing mechanism, a game in which various winning devices provided in the game area are made to win is performed. In the game area, in addition to various winning devices, a center decoration, an image display device, and various rendering devices (see, for example, Patent Document 1) are provided in order to enhance game characteristics.

JP 2012-130803 A

  However, with such a gaming machine, a variety of unexpected effects are required. In order to perform various rendering operations, the number of motors and sensors used in the rendering device tends to increase, and a policy for stabilizing the operation of the rendering device is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the operation of a rendering device.

In order to achieve such an object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a rendering device that performs a predetermined rendering operation, and a rendering control unit that controls the rendering device, the rendering device having an initial position and the rendering The effect member capable of moving between the effect position where the operation is performed, the stepping motor for moving the effect member, and the fact that the effect member has moved to a predetermined detection position between the initial position and the effect position The effect control means has a position information storage area for storing position information of the effect member, and that the effect member has moved to the detection position by the stepping motor when the position detecting unit detects, as the initial value when the presentation member is positioned at the initial position, the detection position corresponding to the stepping motor of the operation pulse of design The counter value, the location information is configured to set as the position information of the presentation member moved to the detected position to be stored in the storage area, in the location information storage area, the operation pulse counter of the stepping motor A value is stored, and the counter value of the operation pulse of the stepping motor stored in the position information storage area is an operation pulse of the stepping motor that moves the effect member to one side between the initial position and the effect position. is added in accordance with the subtracted according to the operation pulses of the stepping motor for moving the other side between the presentation member and the presentation position and the initial position, the counter value on the design, the presentation member is the In the direction to move the effect member of the stepping motor when the position detection means detects movement to the detection position Flip is different.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the rendering device.

It is a front view which shows the state which removed the glass frame from the pachinko game machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the glass frame from the front. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of an upper presentation apparatus. It is a front view showing the upper effect device in the initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the upper-side support part moved to the movable position in the upper-side effect apparatus. It is a front view showing the state where the second upper effect member moved to the movable position in the upper effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the subdisplay apparatus rotationally moved to the movable position in the upper effect apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper performance device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper side base part and the base cover from the front. It is a rear view of the upper side base part of the state which supported the upper side support part in the initial position. It is a rear view of the upper side base part of the state which supported the upper side support part in the movable position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper side support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper side support part from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side support part from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emission part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emission part from back. (A) is a perspective view of the sub display device seen from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the sub display device seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the first upper effect member seen from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first upper effect member seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the second upper effect member seen from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the second upper effect member seen from the rear. It is a front view showing a lower left rendering device and an upper left rendering device in an initial position. It is a front view showing the state where the lower left front side effect member swings to the movable position in the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device. It is a front view showing the state where the upper left front side effect member moved to the movable position in the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device. It is a front view showing a state where a lower left backside effect member and an upper left backside effect member are moved to a movable position in the lower left side rendering device and the upper left side rendering device. It is a perspective view of a lower left side production device. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower left side effect device. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower left back side production member and a lower left back movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower left back side presentation member and a lower left back movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side effect member and the lower left front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower left front side production member and a lower left front side movable member from the back. It is a perspective view of the upper left effect device. It is an exploded perspective view of a left upper effect device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side production member and the upper left back movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side production member and the upper left back movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side effect member and the upper left front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side effect member and the upper left front side movable member from back. It is a front view which shows the right side presentation device of an initial position. It is a front view showing the state where the lower right front side effect member swings to the movable position in the right effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the lower right back side effect member and the upper right back side effect member moved to the movable position in the right side effect device. It is a perspective view of a right side presentation device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right side presentation device. It is the perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower right back side production member and a lower right back movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower right back side production member and a lower right back movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper right back side presentation member and the upper right back movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper right back side presentation member and the upper right back movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower right front side effect member and a lower right front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower right front side effect member and a lower right front side movable member from the back. It is a front view showing the lower effect device in the initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the presentation member in the lower side production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the movable support part moved to the movable position in the lower side production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st and 2nd front side effect member moved to the movable position in a lower side production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st and 2nd back side presentation member rotationally moved to the movable position in the lower side rendering device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a lower side presentation device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower side base part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the lower side base part from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st back side movable support from the front, and (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st back side movable support from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back side movable support from the front, and (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back side movable support from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st front side movable support from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st front side movable support from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd front side movable support from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd front side movable support from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st and 2nd front side effect member from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st and 2nd front side effect member from the back. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and a production control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a special symbol equivalence lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a symbol table per special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a special symbol variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main processing of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 75 of the main control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitoring control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start surveillance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start monitoring process in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol variation in FIG. 82. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol stop symbol display in FIG. 82. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows control processing following Drawing 85 of processing under special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric symbol combination control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 87 of a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 87 of a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. 91 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in FIG. 91. FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process in FIG. 91. FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an error effect contents determination process in FIG. 91. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows lamp production interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows lamp request processing. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing of a production control command. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. FIG. 6 is a schematic view provided for describing the priority levels of the respective interrupt processes. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a device control data output process in FIG. 98. (A) is a flow chart showing initialization operation processing at power on, (B) is a flow chart showing error recovery processing at step number over error, (C) is error recovery processing at position check error And (D) is a flowchart showing an error recovery process at the time of a time monitoring check error. It is a flow chart which shows initial position return processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 102 of an initial position return processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 103 of an initial position return processing. It is a flow chart which shows role article initialization processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation | movement pulse in case an initial position sensor, an intermediate position sensor, and a movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation | movement pulse in case an initial position sensor and a movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st setting example which sets the error determination value of step number over error. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd setting example which sets the error determination value of step number over error. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of an operation | movement table. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of an operation | movement table. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship of the consumption current value of a drive motor and the regulation current value in each presentation apparatus. It is a table showing an example of a simultaneous drive pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation | movement pulse in case an effecting member reciprocates and only an initial position sensor is provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation | movement pulse in the case where only an initial position sensor is provided, when a presentation member performs continuous rotational movement.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine PM is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 as a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and first, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to this figure. The pachinko gaming machine PM of the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game (first special symbol game) We realize coexistence with the second special symbol game). In the present embodiment, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be described as the vertical direction, the longitudinal direction, and the lateral direction.

[General configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. The pachinko game machine PM is, as shown in FIG. 1, configured of an outer frame 1 forming a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured in an outer rectangular frame size, and a rectangular frame size matching this, forming an opening and closing mounting frame It consists mainly of the front frame 2. The front frame 2 is attached to the front opening of the outer frame 1 so as to be able to open, close, and be detached from the front opening of the outer frame 1 by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b arranged at the left side edge of the outer frame 1 and the front frame 2. . Further, the front frame 2 is always held in a closed state engaged with and coupled to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided at the right side edge.

  On the front side of the front frame 2, as shown in FIG. 2, a rectangular glass frame 5 fitted to the upper front area of the front frame 2 is opened / closed and removed laterally using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a, 3b. It is possible to assemble. The glass frame 5 is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2 by using the above-mentioned locking device 4. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 50 is detachably set in the accommodation frame 2a provided on the upper side of the front frame 2 and held through the double-layered glass 5a of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. The game area PA provided on the front of the game player can be viewed visibly. Note that the detailed description of the game area PA is omitted in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the lower left front side of the glass frame 5, upper and lower bowls (upper bowl 6a and lower bowl 6b) for storing gaming balls are provided. On the center lower front side of the glass frame 5, an effect button 10 pressed by the player is provided. On the upper front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp 7 which emits light in accordance with the game development status, and a speaker 8 which generates sound effects in accordance with the game development status are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 1, at the lower right portion of the front frame 2, a launch handle 9 is provided for performing a launch operation of the gaming ball. In the area behind the glass frame 5 in the lower part of the front frame 2 (hereinafter referred to as the game support board 20), a ball feed mechanism 21 for sending out game balls stored in the upper bowl 6a one ball at a time, a ball feed mechanism A launch mechanism 22 or the like is provided to launch the game ball sent out from 21 toward the game area PA.

  Subsequently, the basic structure on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear surface side of the front frame 2, there is attached a back mechanism board 30 formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2, having a window communicating back and forth in the center There is. Each part of the back mechanism board 30 has a tank member 33 for storing gaming balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a bowl member 34 for flowing down the gaming balls supplied from the tank member 33, and a gaming ball for flowing down the bowl members 34 A prize ball payout unit 35 to be paid out, a back side passage member 36 for letting the gaming balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 35 flow down to the upper ball dish 6a or the lower ball dish 6b, and the like are provided. In addition, on the back mechanism board 30, a game board cover 39 is attached which entirely covers the rear side of the game board 100.

  On the back side of the game board 50, a main control board (main control board unit) 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in an integrated manner, and an effect control board (effect control board unit) 200 for controlling overall effects. An image control board (image control board unit) 300 or the like for controlling image display and sound effects according to game development is attached. On the other hand, on the rear side of the back mechanism board 30, a payout control board (payout control board unit) 400 for controlling the launch and payout of the gaming balls, and power control from the gaming facility side A power supply substrate (power supply substrate unit) 450 or the like for supplying power to the electronic component is attached. In addition, these control boards are the back side of the game board 50 or the back side of the back mechanism board 30 in the assembly state accommodated in the transparent resin board case which has a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure, in order to prevent unauthorized modification. Are respectively disposed. The control board and the electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

  In the pachinko game machine PM, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island (installation frame stand) of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5 and the like are closed and locked and provided for gaming. A game is started by storing the game balls and turning the firing handle 9 to rotate. When the firing handle 9 is turned, the gaming balls stored in the upper bowl 6a are sent out one by one to the firing mechanism 22 by the ball feeding mechanism 21, and are shot out onto the gaming area PA by the firing mechanism 22, The pachinko game is developed after that.

[Configuration of game board]
Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 50 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 50 according to the present embodiment has a plate-shaped base member 51 and an inner rail member 56 and an outer rail member 57 attached to the front side of the base member 51. On the front surface of the member 51, a game area PA is formed in which the left area is surrounded by the inner rail member 56 and the upper and right areas are surrounded by the outer rail member 57. Note that, between the inner rail member 56 and the outer rail member 57, a launch passage 59 is formed, which is connected to the upper portion of the game area PA from the side where the launch mechanism 22 is provided.

  In the game area PA, in addition to a windmill and a large number of game nails, the first special symbol display device 81 as well as various winning openings such as the first starting opening 60, the second starting opening 65, the operation gate 70, and the special winning opening 75 and the like. (Refer to FIG. 70) Second special symbol display device 82 (refer to FIG. 70) First special view holding lamp 83 Second special view holding lamp 84 Normal symbol display 85 (refer to FIG. 70) Various display devices such as a diagram holding lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) are provided. A center decoration 90 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and a screen 95a of the effect display device 95 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 90. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 99 for discharging the game balls rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 50. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 50 will be described in order.

  The first starting opening 60 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 61 for detecting entry of the game ball. Entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 60 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting opening 65 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 66 for detecting the entering of the game ball. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 65 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery. Further, the second starting opening 65 includes an ordinary electric jack 67, which is also called a so-called tongue-type chucker, and an ordinary electric jack solenoid 68 (see FIG. 70) for driving the ordinary electric jack 67 to open and close. Prepare. The ordinary electric character 67 is variable between a closed state in which the game ball is unlikely to enter the second starting opening 65 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the state.

  The actuation gate 70 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuation gate switch 71 for detecting passage of gaming balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 70 becomes an opportunity of the normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the normal motorized combination 67 of the second starting opening 65 is to be expanded.

  The big winning opening 75 is a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a winning located disposed under the game area PA It is a mouth. The special winning opening 75 is provided with a special winning opening switch 76 for detecting the entry of the game ball, and for opening and closing the special electric winning combination 77 called a so-called attack device and the special electric lifting combination 77. And a special winning opening solenoid 78 (see FIG. 70). The special electric character 77 is changed into a normal state where the game ball can not enter or hard to enter the big winning opening 75 and an open state where the game ball can enter or easy to enter the large winning opening 75.

  The first special symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 70) performs variable display and finalized display of the first special symbol in response to the game ball entering the first starting opening. Although the first special symbol display device 81 is not shown in detail in FIG. 4, for example, the first special symbol display device 81 is composed of eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp The first special symbol is finalized by stopping flashing and switching to lighting.

  The second special symbol display device 82 (see FIG. 70) performs variable display and finalized display of the second special symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening. Although the second special symbol display device 82 is not shown in detail in FIG. 4, it comprises, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the lamp The second special symbol is finalized by stopping flashing and switching to lighting.

  The first special view reserve lamp 83 and the second special view reserve lamp 84 are respectively composed of, for example, four LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the lighting / flashing display of the lamp Express (up to 4). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is the number of gaming balls entered into the first starting opening during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of a special game, and the execution of the symbol variation Indicates the number of permits that were temporarily suspended. The number of operation reserved balls for the second special symbol is the number of gaming balls that enter the second starting opening during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of a special game, and the execution of the symbol variation Indicates the number of permits that were temporarily suspended.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 85 (see FIG. 70) is constituted of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variation display and determination display of the normal symbol. The general drawing reserve lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) is formed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of reserved symbol variations (the number of normal symbol variations not yet executed). In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 85, a round indicator (not shown) is provided to display the number of round games in the special game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric character 77 operates continuously). .

  The effect display device 95 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol or a notice effect which is variably displayed and stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and also of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Make a pending display. Specifically, on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95, the decoration symbol display portion 96 on which the change display of the decoration symbol or the notice effect display is performed, and the first special in synchronization with the first special view holding lamp 83 The first special view reserve display unit 97 where the reserve display of symbols is executed, and the second special view reserve display unit 98 where the reserve display of the second special symbol is executed in synchronization with the second special view reserve lamp 84 It is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 95. In the decorative symbol display portion 96, three columns of display regions (left display region Z1, middle display region Z2, right display region Z3) serving as variable display regions of the decorative symbol are provided on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are respectively displayed stopped. It has become so. In the normal display mode, a special symbol holding display unit 97, 98 displays a holding image of a white circle when the operation holding ball of the special symbol is generated, and corresponds when the operation holding ball is digested. The hold image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the generation order of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol (the order of ball placement), and can be displayed on each of the reserved display portions 97 and 98 at a maximum of four each.

  The center decoration 90 is installed around the effect display device 95, and has functions such as protecting the channel of the game ball, the screen 95a of the effect display device 95, and decoration. The center decoration 90 includes a plurality of rendering devices (upper rendering device 500, lower left rendering device 600, upper left rendering device 700, right rendering device 800, and lower rendering device that execute rendering operations according to the development status of the game. 900) are provided. Each effect device is configured to include an electric drive motor (stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, you may use other drive sources, such as a solenoid, as a drive source of a presentation apparatus, for example. In addition, the center decoration 90 is provided with a panel lamp (LED lamp) 91 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, drive motors provided in the respective rendering devices are collectively referred to as "motor M". The effect lamps such as the frame lamp 7 and the board lamp 91 are generically referred to as "effect lamp LP". The effect display device 95 and the sub display device 561 described later are also collectively referred to as “image display device DS”. In the present embodiment, although the LED lamp is used as the effect lamp LP, other light emitting means other than the LED lamp may be used as long as it can exhibit a lamp effect.

  When a game ball rolling down the game area PA enters any of the first start opening 60, the second start opening 65, the operation gate 70, and the special winning opening 75, a winning ball according to the type of the winning opening Are dispensed to the upper ball tray 6a or the lower ball tray 6b by the winning ball dispensing unit 35. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 60 (second starting opening 65), the first special symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 81 (second special symbol display device 82). At the same time, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 96 of the effect display device 95 in synchronization with this. The variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped (decided display) after the elapse of the fluctuation time previously determined by the lottery.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit, it shifts to the special game which is a game state advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 75 starts Be done. The stop aspect of the decorative symbol indicating a big hit is, for example, an aspect in which the types of three symbols match. In this embodiment, as special games, 2R special game in which round game is set 2 times (2 rounds), 12R special game in which round games are set 12 times (12 rounds), and 16 round games A 16R special game set to (16 rounds) is provided.

  In this embodiment, even if the game is shifted to any of 2R special game, 12R special game and 16R special game, the probability fluctuation function of special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “probable change”) may be activated after the end of the special game. . When the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, a lottery having a jackpot probability higher than that of the normal probability state is performed, so that a new special game is generated relatively early.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "time-shortening") operates uniformly along with the probability variation function. When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shortened than the normal state, and the number of lottery times per unit time is improved more than the normal state (unit time You can increase the ease of winning the jackpot). In this example, the duration of the time saving state is set to a period of a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) of the special symbol from the end of the special game. On the other hand, if it is a fluctuation time shortening function attached to the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, it is set to a period after the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs.

  When the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the so-called electric chew support function is activated to shift to the electric chew support state (the ball entry easy state). The easy-to-place ball condition increases the ease of entering the second starting opening 65 by activating the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol, the probability variation function of the normal symbol, and the open time extension function of the ordinary electric symbol. It is possible to In this easy-to-enter-the-ball state, the possibility of increasing the number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol per fixed time more than usual increases and also the ease of entering the second starting opening 65 is increased. The possibility of increasing the number of ball entry also increases. Therefore, as a result of the chance to get the winning ball by entering the second starting opening 65 during that period by the operation of the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chow support function, the ball holding is hardly reduced. It becomes possible to continue the game.

[Configuration of upper stage rendering device]
Next, the upper rendering device 500 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. The upper effect device 500 is provided on the upper front side of the center decoration 90, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 10, the upper effect apparatus 500 includes an upper base portion 501, a first upper support portion 521, a second upper support portion 531, a support cover portion 541, and a cover light emitting portion 551. The sub display device 561, the first upper effect member 571, and the second upper effect member 581 are configured.

  The upper base portion 501 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left and right direction using a resin material, as shown in FIGS. The upper base portion 501 is attached and fixed to the upper front side of the center decoration 90 together with a base cover 504 that covers the rear side of the upper base portion 501. An elongated left guide hole 502 is formed on the left side of the upper base portion 501. An elongated right guide hole 503 is formed on the right side of the upper base portion 501. The upper portion of the left guide hole 502 is formed to extend in a direction inclined obliquely to the right with respect to the vertical, and the lower portion of the left guide hole 502 is extended in a direction inclined obliquely to the right further to the upper portion of the left guide hole 502 Is formed. The right guide hole 503 is formed to extend substantially in parallel with the upper portion of the left guide hole 502. The right guide pin 523 of the first upper support portion 521 slidably engages with the right guide hole 503. Thereby, in order to distinguish the upper base portion 501 from the other initial position (hereinafter, the upper position does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the upper base portion 501. An upper initial position), and an effect position (hereinafter, referred to as an upper movable position to be distinguished from other effect positions) located on the lower left of the upper initial position and overlapping on the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 The first upper support portion 521 is supported so as to be vertically movable in the diagonal direction. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is slidably engaged with the left guide hole 502. On the left front side of the upper base portion 501, a left guide portion 519 is formed which slidably guides the left edge portion of the second upper support portion 531 coupled to the first upper support portion 521.

  An upper support driving motor 505 for moving the first upper support 521 is attached to the front end of the upper end of the upper base 501. An upper support drive mechanism 506 for moving the first upper support 521 using the rotational drive force of the upper support drive motor 505 is provided on the right rear side of the upper base 501. The upper support drive mechanism 506 is configured to have a gear mechanism including a swing gear 507 which is rotationally driven by the upper support drive motor 505, and a drive arm 511. A gear engagement pin 508 that engages with the second engagement hole 513 of the drive arm 511 is provided on the side of the oscillating gear 507. The drive arm 511 is formed in a long and thin plate shape using a resin material. The proximal end of the drive arm 511 is pivotally connected to the lower right rear side of the upper base portion 501, and the drive arm 511 is attached to the right rear side of the upper base portion 501 so as to be vertically swingable. An elongated hole-shaped first engagement hole 512 is formed at the end of the drive arm 511, with which the end of the right guide pin 523 of the first upper support 521 inserted in the right guide hole 503 engages. At an intermediate portion of the drive arm 511, a long hole-like second engagement hole 513 is formed in which the gear engagement pin 508 of the swing gear 507 is slidably engaged.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the drive arm 511 swings up and down by the rotation of the swing gear 507 and moves the first upper support portion 521 up and down in the oblique direction along the right guide hole 503. Move it. The second engagement hole 513 is formed to extend linearly along the extension direction of the drive arm 511. However, at the base end of the second engagement hole 513, the first upper support portion 521 is at the upper initial position And is curved so as to be aligned with the movement locus of the gear engagement pin 508 at the time of reaching the position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the downward positional deviation of the first upper support portion 521 which is generated based on the backlash of the gear mechanism including the oscillating gear 507.

  An upper initial position sensor 516a is attached to the right front side of the upper base portion 501 to detect that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper initial position. Below the upper initial position sensor 516a on the front side of the right side of the upper base portion 501, the first upper support portion 521 is an intermediate position between the upper initial position and the upper movable position (hereinafter, the upper side to distinguish from other intermediate positions) An upper middle position sensor 516b is attached to detect movement to the middle position). An upper movable position sensor 516c for detecting that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper movable position is attached to the right rear side of the upper base portion 501. A sensor detection unit (not shown) is formed on the front side of the middle portion of the drive arm 511, which is detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c when the drive arm 511 moves the first upper support portion 521 to the upper movable position. .

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first upper support portion 521 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left and right direction using a resin material. The first upper support portion 521 is coupled to the second upper support portion 531 so as to cover the rear side of the second upper support portion 531. Thus, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are vertically movably supported by the upper base portion 501 between the upper initial position and the upper movable position. A right guide pin 523 engaged with the right guide hole 503 of the upper base portion 501 and the first engagement hole 512 of the drive arm 511 is provided on the rear side of the first upper support portion 521. When the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper initial position to the rear of the right side of the first upper support portion 521, it is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, and when the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper intermediate position A sensor detection unit 524 detected by the upper middle position sensor 516 b is formed. In the upper left portion of the first upper support portion 521, a long guide pin insertion hole 525 extending in the lateral direction is formed. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the second upper support 531 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left and right direction using a resin material. At a central portion of the second upper support 531, a display coupling unit 532 coupled to the rotational coupling unit 563 of the sub display unit 561 is formed. The second upper support 531 supports the sub display device 561 so that the screen 561 a faces forward with the rotational coupling portion 563 of the sub display device 561 and the display device coupling portion 532 coupled. The sub display device 561 is configured to be rotatable relative to the rotational coupling portion 563. Thus, in a state in which the rotational coupling portion 563 of the sub display device 561 and the display device coupling portion 532 are coupled, the second upper support portion 531 has an initial position where the sub display device 561 extends in the left-right direction To distinguish it from the position (referred to as “rotation initial position”), and the effect position rotated counterclockwise by 270 degrees (viewed from the front) from the rotation initial position (hereinafter referred to as “rotation movable position to distinguish from other effect positions And so as to rotatably support the secondary display device 561 along a plane including the screen 561a.

  A display drive motor 534 for rotating the sub display 561 is attached to the front side of the central portion of the second upper support 531. A rotation drive mechanism 535 is provided on the rear side of the central portion of the second upper support 531 to rotate the sub display device 561 using the rotation drive force of the display device drive motor 534. The rotation drive mechanism 535 is configured using a gear mechanism that is rotationally driven by the display device drive motor 534, and meshes with the rotation gear 564 of the sub display device 561. A rotation initial position sensor 533a is attached on the front side of the second upper support 531 above the display device coupling portion 532 to detect that the sub display device 561 has moved to the rotation initial position. An intermediate position between the rotation initial position and the rotation movable position on the front side of the second upper support 531 to the left of the display device coupling portion 532 (hereinafter, the rotation intermediate position is distinguished from other intermediate positions) A rotational intermediate position sensor 533b is attached to detect rotational movement to a position (referred to as position). The rotation intermediate position is set to a position where the secondary display device 561 is rotated counterclockwise (as viewed from the front) by 90 degrees from the rotation initial position.

  A long hole-shaped first effect member engaging portion 536 is formed on the left side of the second upper support portion 531 so that the rear fixed portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is displaceably engaged in the left-right direction. The rear fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 and the first effect member engaging portion 536 are engaged, and the front side of the rear fixing portion 576 is covered by a support cover portion 541 (left portion) described later In the state, the second upper support portion 531 supports the first upper effect member 571. The left guide pin 577 formed in the rear fixed portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521 and slides in the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. Movably engaged. Thus, while the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move up and down between the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position, the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is the right guide hole 503. And the first upper effect member 571 moves up and down integrally with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531. When the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move to the upper movable position beyond the upper intermediate position, the left guide pin 577 is inclined further to the right than the upper portion of the left guide hole 502. The first upper effect member 571 is slightly displaced to the left with respect to the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 in order to slide on the lower portion of the lower portion.

  A second effect member receiving portion 537 is provided on the right side of the second upper support portion 531 to slidably move the rear movable portion 586 of the second upper effect member 581 in the vertical direction. The second movable member 586 of the second upper effect member 581 is received by the second effect member receiving portion 537, and the second light emitting member receiving portion 537 is covered with a cover light emitting portion 551 described later. The upper support 531 supports the second upper rendering member 581 so as to be vertically movable in the vertical direction while hiding the drive transmission mechanism (the upper rendering portion drive gear 539 and the like) of the second upper rendering member 581. An upper rendering unit drive motor 538 for moving the second upper rendering member 581 is attached to the lower right portion rear side of the second upper support portion 531. An upper effect portion drive gear 539 for moving the second upper effect member 581 using the rotational driving force of the upper effect portion drive motor 538 is attached to the lower right front side of the second upper support portion 531. The upper rendering portion drive gear 539 is engaged with the rack gear portion 588 of the second upper rendering member 581.

  The support cover 541 and the cover light emitter 551 are attached to the front side of the second upper support 531. The support cover portion 541 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and is disposed between the second upper support portion 531 and the sub display device 561. The front side of the second upper support portion 531 is covered. On the right side of the support cover portion 541, a light transmitting portion 546 which can emit light by transmitting light from the light emitting element 554 disposed on the lamp substrate 552 of the cover light emitting portion 551 is formed.

  A display device insertion hole 542 is formed in the central portion of the support cover portion 541 and through which the rotational coupling portion 563 of the sub display device 561 is inserted. An initial position sensor insertion hole 543a into which the rotation initial position sensor 533a of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed above the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. An intermediate position sensor insertion hole 543b into which the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed on the left side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. A movable position sensor insertion hole 543c into which the rotation movable position sensor 553c of the cover light emitting portion 551 is inserted is formed on the right side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. In the vicinity of the initial position sensor insertion hole 543a in the central portion of the support cover portion 541, an initial position stopper portion 544 for restricting (clockwise) rotation of the sub display device 561 beyond the initial position of rotation is formed. In the vicinity of the movable position sensor insertion hole 543c in the central portion of the support cover portion 541, a movable position stopper portion 545 is formed which restricts the (counterclockwise) rotation of the sub display device 561 beyond the rotational movable position.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the cover light emitting unit 551 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the light transmitting unit 546 formed on the right side of the support cover unit 541. . A lamp substrate 552 is attached to the front of the cover light emitting unit 551 so as to face the light transmitting unit 546 of the support cover unit 541. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552, a plurality of light emitting elements 554 for emitting light of the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 are provided. On the left side of the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552, a rotatable movable position sensor 553c is disposed which detects that the sub display device 561 has been rotationally moved to the rotationally movable position.

  The cover light emitting portion 551 overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 covers the front side of the second effect member receiving portion 537 that receives the drive transmission mechanism of the second upper effect member 581. It has become. An upper guide pin 556 and a lower guide pin 557 which are slidably engaged with the guide holes 587 of the second upper effect member 581 are formed on the lower rear side of the cover light emitting portion 551. The upper guide pin 556 and the lower guide pin 557 are arranged side by side in a direction inclined obliquely to the left with respect to the vertical. Accordingly, the second effect member receiving portion 537 and the cover light emitting portion 551 of the second upper effect member 581 are the first upper effect member 571 (the first light emitting effect) of the second upper effect member 581 (the second light emitting effect portion 582). An initial position (hereinafter referred to as a proximity initial position to be distinguished from other initial positions) approaching the right of the portion 572), and an effect in which the second upper effect member 581 separates from the first upper effect member 571 to the lower right The second upper presentation member 581 is supported so as to be vertically movable up and down between the position (hereinafter referred to as a separate movable position to distinguish it from other presentation positions). A proximity initial position sensor 558a that detects that the second upper presentation member 581 has moved to the proximity initial position is attached to the upper rear side of the cover light emitting unit 551. On the lower rear side of the cover light emitting unit 551, a separation movable position sensor 558c is attached, which detects that the second upper rendering member 581 has moved to the separation movable position.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the sub display device 561 is configured to have a screen 561a on the front side that can display a predetermined effect image. The sub-display device 561 is an image (for example, an image that is viewed by the player via the first light-emitting effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 or the second light-emitting effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581 as an effect image. An image for coloring the first light emitting effect portion 572 or the second light emitting effect portion 582) and an image directly viewed by the player are displayed on the screen 561a. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 561. As shown in FIG. 18B, on the rear side of the central portion of the sub display device 561, a rotational coupling portion 563 coupled to the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support 531 is attached. The sub display device 561 is configured to be movable relative to the rotational coupling portion 563 (that is, the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support portion 531) together with the rotary gear 564 coupled to the rear side of the sub display device 561. Be done. When the sub-display device 561 is rotationally moved to the initial position of rotation behind the top of the sub-display device 561, it is detected by the rotation initial position sensor 533a, and when the sub-display device 561 is rotationally moved to the intermediate rotation position, the intermediate rotation position sensor 533b A sensor detection unit 565 is attached, which is detected by the second display unit 561 and is detected by the movable position sensor 553c when the sub display device 561 is rotationally moved to the movable position.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first upper effect member 571 is formed of a translucent resin material and is formed in a plate shape bent in the shape of “コ” when viewed from above, and is given a predetermined decoration It has the first light emitting effect portion 572 and the rear fixing portion 576 engaged with the first effect member engaging portion 536 of the second upper support portion 531 so as to be displaceable in the left and right direction. In a state where the rear fixing portion 576 engages with the first effect member engaging portion 536 and is supported by the second upper support portion 531, the first light emitting effect portion 572 is on the left front of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 It is supposed to be deployed. That is, the left side portion of the sub display device 561 is disposed between the front side portion (first light emitting effect portion 572) and the rear side portion (rear side fixing portion 576) of the first upper effect member 571. At the rear of the rear fixing portion 576, a left guide pin 577 projecting to the rear of the rear fixing portion 576 is formed. As described above, the left guide pin 577 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521 and slidably engaged with the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. An elongated hole-shaped guide hole 578 extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower left of the rear fixing portion 576 in the rear portion of the first upper effect member 571. The guide hole 578 engages with a guide support 547 formed on the left rear side of the support cover 541 and is supported so as to be laterally displaceable.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the second upper effect member 581 is formed of a translucent resin material and is formed in a plate shape bent in the shape of “コ” when viewed from above, and is given a predetermined decoration The second light emitting effect portion 582 and the rear movable portion 586 received by the second effect member receiving portion 537 of the second upper support portion 531 are provided. With the rear movable portion 586 being received by the second effect member receiving portion 537 and supported by the second upper support portion 531 (and the cover light emitting portion 551) so as to be vertically movable, the second light emitting effect portion 582 is a secondary display It is arranged at the right front of the screen 561a of the device 561. That is, the right side portion of the sub display device 561 is disposed between the front side portion (second light emitting effect portion 582) and the rear side portion (rear side movable portion 586) of the second upper effect member 581. The second light emission effect unit 582 is disposed on a plane (hereinafter, may be referred to as an arrangement surface) parallel to the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 passing through the first light emission effect unit 572.

  When the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position, the first light emitting effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side, When viewed from the front, the front of the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 is covered by the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. In this state, when the secondary display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, light emitted from the screen 561a is transmitted through the first light emitting effect portion 572 or the second light emitting effect portion 582. In addition, when the first light emitting effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side, an integrated decorative shape (for example, predetermined characters) To form a row).

  A long guide hole 587 is formed at the center of the rear movable portion 586. The guide hole 587 is formed to extend in a direction inclined to the left with respect to the vertical. The upper guide pin 556 and the lower guide pin 557 of the cover light emitting portion 551 slidably engage with the guide hole 587. On the left side of the rear movable portion 586, a rack gear portion 588 engaged with the upper rendering portion drive gear 539 of the second upper support portion 531 is formed. When the second upper rendering member 581 moves to the proximity initial position to the front left side of the rear movable portion 586, it is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, and when the second upper rendering member 581 moves to the separation movable position, the separation movable position sensor A sensor detection unit 589 detected by 558 c is formed.

  In the upper effect device 500 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (during effect standby), as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are at the upper side. Moving to the initial position, the secondary display device 561 rotationally moves to the rotation initial position, and the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position. At this time, when the first light emission effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emission effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side, and viewed from the front, the first light emission effect portion The front of the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 is covered by the second light emission effect unit 582. At this time, the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 integrated with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 do not overlap in front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95. Located at the top of the decoration 90. In this state, when the secondary display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the light emitted from the screen 561a passes through the first light emitting effect portion 572 or the second light emitting effect portion 582. Thereby, the first light emission effect unit 572 and the second light emission effect unit 582 emit light so as to be colored according to the effect image displayed on the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561.

  In a predetermined gaming state (during production operation), as shown in FIG. 7, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are movable upward to the left from the upper initial position by the upper support drive motor 505 or the like. Move to position. At this time, the integrated first light emitting effect portion 572 and the second light emitting effect portion 582 move downward to the left together with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531, and the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 Overlap. At this time, since the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 slides from the upper portion to the lower portion of the left guide hole 502 in the upper base portion 501, the first upper effect member 571 becomes the first upper support portion 521 and the first upper support portion 521. 2) It is slightly displaced to the left with respect to the upper support 531. Therefore, a gap is generated between the first light emitting effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581. Further, displacement of the first upper effect member 571 to the left prevents contact with the first upper effect member 571 when the sub display device 561 is rotationally moved. The first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 (the first light emission effect portion 572 and the second light emission effect portion 582 integrated with each other) are upper initial positions and upper intermediate positions by the upper support portion drive motor 505 or the like. It is also possible to perform a rendering operation that repeatedly reciprocates between (or near the upper middle position).

  With the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 moved to the upper movable position, the second upper effect member 581 is moved from the proximity initial position to the lower movable movable position by the upper effect drive motor 538 or the like. Do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the second light emitting effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581 leaves the lower right of the first light emitting effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the first light emitting effect A part of the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 can be viewed from the front via the gap between the unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. In addition, by moving the second upper effect member 581 downward to the right, it is prevented that the sub display device 561 abuts on the second upper effect member 581 when it is rotationally moved.

  With the second upper effect member 581 moved to the separation movable position, the sub display 561 is rotationally moved from the initial rotation position to the rotation movable position (or the intermediate rotation position) by the display device drive motor 534 or the like. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9, the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 is extended long in the vertical direction, and the sub display device is viewed from the front through the gap between the first light emission effect portion 572 and the second light emission effect portion 582 Almost the entire screen 561 a of the screen 561 can be viewed. In this state, when the sub-display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 does not pass through the first light emission effect portion 572 or the second light emission effect portion 582 ) It will be viewed directly. At this time, since the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 can be visually recognized from the front, it is also possible to display an effect image according to the light emission effect of the light transmitting portion 546. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. As an effect image, for example, an effect image integrated with the image displayed on the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95 is displayed on the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561. Further, during the game standby demonstration or when a predetermined effect is performed, an effect image independent of the image displayed on the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95 may be displayed on the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561. Further, during the game standby demonstration or at the time of performing a predetermined effect, an effect image for coloring the first light emission effect unit 572 and the second light emission effect unit 582 may be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561.

[Configuration of lower left side rendering device and upper left side rendering device]
Next, the left lower rendering device 600 and the upper left rendering device 700 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. The lower left rendering device 600 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51 and configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51, as shown in FIG. 6 is a view of the gaming board 50 with the base member 51 removed. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the lower left rendering device 600 includes a lower left back base portion 601, a lower left back movable member 611, a lower left back effect member 621, a lower left front side base portion 631, and a lower left front movable member 651. And a lower left front side effect member 661.

  The lower left back side base portion 601 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material, as shown in FIG. A long guide hole 602 is formed in the middle of the lower left rear base portion 601. The guide hole 602 is formed to extend obliquely upward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 616 of the lower left rear side movable member 611 engages with the guide hole 602 in a slidable manner. Thereby, the lower left back base portion 601 is relatively initial position on the left side (which does not overlap in front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95) between the lower left back base portion 601 and the lower left front side base portion 631. In order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it is referred to as the lower left back initial position), and an effect position which is located on the upper right of the lower left back initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 Between the lower left rear movable position) and the lower left rear movable member 611 so as to be movable leftward and rightward.

  A lower left rear drive motor 603 for moving the lower left rear movable member 611 is attached to the lower end front side of the lower left rear base portion 601. A lower left rear drive gear 604 is provided on the lower front side of the lower left rear base portion 601 to move the lower left rear movable member 611 using the rotational driving force of the lower left rear drive motor 603. The lower left rear side drive gear 604 meshes with the rack gear portion 617 of the lower left rear side movable member 611. A lower left rear initial position sensor 605a is attached to the front middle portion left side of the lower left rear base portion 601 to detect movement of the lower left rear movable member 611 to the lower left rear initial position. A lower left rear movable position sensor 605c is provided on the right front of the lower left rear base portion 601 to detect that the lower left rear movable member 611 has moved to the lower left rear movable position. On the upper front side of the lower left rear base portion 601, an upper guide portion 606 is formed which slidably guides the rear upper edge of the lower left rear movable member 611.

  The lower left rear movable member 611 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, using a resin material, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. The lower left rear movable member 611 is coupled to the lower left rear rendering member 621 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left rear rendering member 621. Thus, the lower left rear effect member 621 and the lower left rear movable member 611 are supported movably to the left and right with respect to the lower left rear base portion 601 between the lower left initial position and the lower left rear movable position. The lamp substrate 612 is attached to the front of the lower left rear movable member 611 so as to face the light transmitting portion 623 of the lower left rear rendering member 621. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 612, a plurality of light emitting elements 613 that cause the light transmitting portion 623 of the lower left rear effect member 621 to emit light is disposed. On the lower rear side of the lower left rear movable member 611, a plate-like slide guide portion 616 engaged with the guide hole 602 of the lower left rear base portion 601 is attached. At the lower edge of the lower left rear movable member 611, a rack gear portion 617 engaged with the lower left rear drive gear 604 of the lower left rear base portion 601 is formed. When the lower left rear movable member 611 moves to the lower left rear initial position to the middle part rear side of the lower left rear movable member 611, it is detected by the lower left rear initial position sensor 605a, and when the lower left rear movable member 611 moves to the lower left rear movable position A sensor detection unit 618 detected by the movable position sensor 605 c is formed.

  The lower left rear effect member 621 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29. A plurality of light transmitting portions 623 aligned vertically are formed on the front side of the lower left rear effect member 621 on which a predetermined decoration is performed. The light transmitting portion 623 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 613 disposed on the lamp substrate 612 of the lower left rear movable member 611 so as to emit light.

  The lower left front side base portion 631 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31. The lower left front side base portion 631 is formed by using an upper boss portion 632 a formed on the upper rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631 and a lower boss portion 632 b formed on the lower rear side. Coupled to the front of the 601. Thus, the lower left rear effect member 621 and the lower left rear movable member 611 are disposed in the gap between the lower left front base portion 631 and the lower left rear base portion 601.

  A tilt support portion 634 rotatably supporting a tilt support member 641 connected to the lower left front side movable member 651 is formed at a central portion of the lower left front side base portion 631. An elongated hole shaped guide hole 635 is formed on the upper side of the lower left front side base portion 631. The guide hole 635 is formed to extend in a curved arc shape so that the upper side is convex. The guide pin 657 of the lower left front side movable member 651 engages slidably with the guide hole 635. Thereby, the lower left front side base portion 631 is distinguished from the initial position extending vertically (not overlapping the front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the lower left front side base portion 631 (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions) (Hereinafter referred to as the left standing initial position) and a rendering position overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 by tilting to the right from the left standing initial position (hereinafter, left tilting movable to distinguish from other rendering positions The lower left front side movable member 651 is supported so as to be able to swing and displace between the position (referred to as a position).

  A left standing initial setting position sensor 636a is attached to the upper left of the tilt support portion 634 on the rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631 for detecting displacement of the lower left front side movable member 651 to the left standing initial position. A left tilt movable position sensor 636c is attached to a position on the rear side of the lower left front base 631 just above the tilt support portion 634 to detect that the lower left front movable member 651 is displaced to the left tilt movable position. The lower left front side drive motor 637 for moving the lower left front side movable member 651 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631. A lower left front side drive mechanism 638 is provided on the lower rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631 for swingingly displacing the lower left front side movable member 651 using rotational driving force of the lower left front side drive motor 637.

  The lower left front drive mechanism 638 is configured to have a gear mechanism 639 rotationally driven by the lower left front drive motor 637, and a tilt support member 641. The tilt support member 641 is formed in a disc shape using a resin material, and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 634 of the lower left front side base portion 631. The front portion of the tilting support member 641 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 656 of the lower left front side movable member 651. An elongated hole-like engagement hole portion 642 is formed on the side of the tilting support member 641 so as to protrude to the side (downward) of the tilting support member 641. An engagement pin 639a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 639 engages with the engagement hole portion 642 in a slidable manner. As a result, the tilt support member 641 rotates in response to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 639, and swings and displaces the lower left front-side movable member 651 coupled to the tilt support member 641. When the tilting support member 641 swings the left lower front side movable member 651 to the left standing initial position on the side of the tilting support member 641, it is detected by the left standing initial position sensor 636a, and the tilting support member 641 is moved to the left lower front side When the member 651 is swung to the left tilt movable position, a sensor detection unit 643 is formed which is detected by the left tilt movable position sensor 636c.

  The lower left front side movable member 651 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, using a resin material, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. The lower left front side movable member 651 is coupled to the lower left front side effect member 661 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left front side effect member 661. Thereby, the lower left front side effect member 661 and the lower left front side movable member 651 are supported so as to be able to swing and displace between the left standing initial position and the left tilting movable position with respect to the lower left front side base portion 631. A lamp substrate 652 is attached to the front of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to face the light transmitting portion 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 652, a plurality of light emitting elements 653 for emitting light of the light transmitting portion 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661 is disposed. On the lower rear side of the lower left front side movable member 651, a connecting shaft portion 656 connected to the tilting support member 641 of the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed. A guide pin 657 engaged with the guide hole 635 of the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed on the rear side of the middle portion of the lower left front side movable member 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the lower left front-side effect member 661 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A translucent portion 663 having the shape of a character is formed on the front side of the lower left front side effect member 661 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The light transmitting portion 663 transmits light from the light emitting element 653 disposed on the lamp substrate 652 of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the left upper rendering device 700 is provided on the upper left side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. That is, the upper left rendering device 700 is arranged above the lower left rendering device 600. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the left upper rendering apparatus 700 includes an upper left back base portion 701, an upper left back movable member 711, an upper left back rendering member 721, an upper left front side base portion 731 and an upper left front side movable member 751. And the upper left front side effect member 761.

  The upper left back side base portion 701 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, using a resin material, as shown in FIG. At the top of the upper left back base portion 701, a long guide hole 702 is formed. The guide hole 702 is formed to extend obliquely downward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 716 of the upper left back movable member 711 is slidably engaged with the guide hole 702. Thereby, the upper left back base portion 701 is relatively initial position on the left side (which does not overlap in front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95) between the upper left back base portion 701 and the upper left front side base portion 731. In order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it is called the upper left back initial position) and an effect position that is located on the lower right of the upper left back initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 And the left upper back movable member 711 is movably supported to the left and the right between the upper left back movable position) and the upper left back movable position.

  An upper left rear driving motor 703 for moving the upper left rear movable member 711 is attached to the upper end front side of the upper left rear base portion 701. An upper left rear drive gear (not shown) is provided on the upper front side of the upper left rear base portion 701 to move the upper left rear movable member 711 using the rotational driving force of the upper left rear drive motor 703. The upper left rear side drive gear meshes with the rack gear portion 717 of the upper left rear side movable member 711. An upper left rear initial position sensor 705a is attached to the front middle portion left side of the upper left rear base portion 701 to detect that the upper left rear movable member 711 has moved to the upper left rear initial position. An upper left rear movable position sensor 705c is attached to the front middle portion right of the upper left rear base portion 701 to detect that the upper left rear movable member 711 has moved to the upper left rear movable position. On the lower front side of the upper left rear base portion 701, a lower guide portion 706 is formed which slidably guides the lower rear edge of the upper left rear movable member 711 in a slidable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left rear movable member 711 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material. The upper left rear movable member 711 is coupled to the upper left rear rendering member 721 so as to cover the rear of the upper left rear rendering member 721. Thus, the upper left rear effect member 721 and the upper left rear movable member 711 are supported movably to the left and right with respect to the upper left rear base portion 701 between the upper left rear initial position and the upper left rear movable position. A lamp substrate 712 is attached to the front of the upper left rear movable member 711 so as to face the light transmitting portion 723 of the upper left rear rendering member 721. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 712, a plurality of light emitting elements 713 for emitting light from the light transmitting portion 723 of the upper left rear effect member 721 are disposed. On the upper rear side of the upper left rear movable member 711, a plate-like slide guide portion 716 engaged with the guide hole 702 of the upper left rear base portion 701 is attached. At an upper edge portion of the upper left back movable member 711, a rack gear portion 717 is formed which meshes with the upper left back drive gear (not shown) of the upper left back base portion 701. When the upper left rear movable member 711 moves to the upper left rear initial position to the middle part rear side of the upper left rear movable member 711, it is detected by the upper left rear initial position sensor 705a, and when the upper left rear movable member 711 moves to the upper left rear movable position A sensor detection unit 718 detected by the movable position sensor 705c is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left rear effect member 721 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light transmitting sections 723 arranged vertically are formed on the front side of the upper left back side rendering member 721 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The light transmitting portion 723 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 713 disposed on the lamp substrate 712 of the upper left back movable member 711 so as to emit light.

  The upper left front side base portion 731 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, using a resin material, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. The upper left front side base portion 731 is an upper boss portion 732a formed on the upper rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731, an intermediate boss portion 732b formed on the middle rear side, and a lower boss formed on the lower rear side. It is coupled to the front of the upper left back base portion 701 using the portion 732c. Thus, the upper left rear effect member 721 and the upper left rear movable member 711 are disposed in the gap between the upper left front base portion 731 and the upper left rear base portion 701.

  A vertical movement support portion 733 is formed on the right rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731 to support the vertical movement support member 741 coupled with the upper left front side movable member 751 via the support connection member 756 in an oblique direction. Be done. An elongated right guide hole 735 is formed in the vicinity of the left side of the vertical movement support portion 733 in the upper left front side base portion 731. The vertical movement support portion 733 and the right guide hole 735 are formed to extend in a direction obliquely inclined to the right with respect to the vertical. The right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 are slidably inserted into the right guide hole 735. An elongated left guide hole 734 is formed on the left side and the rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. The left guide hole 734 is formed to extend in the vertical direction. The left guide pin 759 of the upper left front side movable member 751 slidably engages with the left guide hole 734. Thus, the upper left front side base portion 731 is located on the front side of the upper left front side base portion 731 above the lower left front side movable member 651 (lower left front side rendering member 661) at the initial position of the left standing initial position (Hereinafter referred to as the upper initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions), an effect located in the upper upper vicinity of the lower left front side movable member 651 (lower left front side rendering member 661) below the upper initial position. The upper left front side movable member 751 is supported so as to be vertically movable between the position (hereinafter referred to as a lower movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions).

  An upper initial position sensor (not shown) is attached on the left upper side of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731 to detect that the upper left front side movable member 751 has moved to the upper initial position. A lower movable position sensor 736c is attached to the lower left of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731 for detecting that the upper left front side movable member 751 has moved to the lower movable position. An upper left front side drive motor 737 for moving the upper left front side movable member 751 is attached to the upper rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. An upper left front side drive mechanism 738 for moving the upper left front side movable member 751 up and down using the rotational driving force of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is provided on the rear side of the middle portion of the upper left front side base portion 731.

  The upper left front side drive mechanism 738 is configured to have a gear mechanism 739 rotationally driven by the upper left front side drive motor 737, and a vertically movable support member 741. The vertical movement support member 741 is formed in a plate shape extending in the vertical direction using a resin material, and is supported by the vertical movement support portion 733 of the upper left front side base portion 731 so as to be vertically movable in the diagonal direction. The front portion of the vertical movement support member 741 is connected to the upper left front side movable member 751 via the support connection member 756. A rack gear portion 742 that meshes with the gear of the gear mechanism 739 is formed on the upper side of the left side portion of the vertical movement support member 741. Accordingly, the vertical movement support member 741 vertically moves in the oblique direction according to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 739, and vertically moves the upper left front side movable member 751 coupled with the vertical movement support member 741 via the support coupling member 756. Move it. When the vertical movement support member 741 moves the upper left front side movable member 751 to the upper initial position below the left side portion of the vertical movement support member 741, it is detected by the upper initial position sensor (not shown) and the vertical movement support member 741 is upper left A sensor detection unit 743 is formed which is detected by the lower movable position sensor 736c when the front movable member 751 is moved to the lower movable position. On the left rear side of the vertical movement support member 741, a stopper portion 744 to which the projection 739a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 739 can be formed is formed. The stopper portion 744 restricts the movement of the upper left front side movable member 751 beyond the upper initial position (upward) and restricts the movement of the upper left front side movable member 751 beyond the lower movable position (downward).

  The right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is slanted to the right so that the distance from the left guide hole 734 becomes narrower as it goes downward. On the other hand, the distance between the right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 and the left guide pin 759 of the upper left front side movable member 751 is constant. As a result, when the vertical movement support member 741 moves downward, the amount of movement of the right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 directly below is smaller than the amount of movement of the left guide pin 759 directly below. Since the upper left front side movable member 751 is configured to be rotatable relative to the support connecting member 756, the upper left front side movable member 751 is inclined to the left as it moves downward together with the vertical movement supporting member 741 and the support connecting member 756. Thus, the upper left front side movable member 751 driven by the vertical movement support member 741 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while being inclined leftward from the state extending in the vertical direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front side movable member 751 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material. The upper left front side movable member 751 is coupled to the upper left front side effect member 761 so as to cover the rear side of the upper left front side effect member 761. Thereby, the upper left front side effect member 761 and the upper left front side movable member 751 are supported movably up and down between the upper initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the upper left front side base portion 731. A lamp substrate 752 is attached to the front of the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to face the light transmitting portion 763 of the upper left front side effect member 761. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 752, a plurality of light emitting elements 753 for emitting light of the light transmitting portion 763 of the upper left front side effect member 761 are disposed. On the right rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751, a support connecting member 756 connected to the vertical movement support member 741 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is attached. A left guide pin 759 engaged with the left guide hole 734 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is formed on the left rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751.

  The support connecting member 756 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is attached to the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to be rotatable relative to the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to overlap the right side and the rear side. At the top and bottom of the rear side of the support connection member 756, a right guide pin 757 is formed to project rearward and extend. The upper and lower right guide pins 757 are inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731 and connected with the vertical movement support member 741 by the connection screw. An auxiliary guide pin 758 is formed at a rear middle portion of the support connecting member 756 so as to protrude rearward. The auxiliary guide pin 758 is inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731 and coupled with the vertical movement support member 741.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front-side effect member 761 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A light transmitting portion 763 having a character shape is formed on the front side of the upper left front side effect member 761 on which a predetermined decoration is performed. The light transmitting portion 763 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 753 disposed on the lamp substrate 752 of the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to emit light.

  In the lower left side rendering device 600 and the upper left side rendering device 700 configured as described above, the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side rendering device 600 as shown in FIG. Is displaced to the left standing initial position, and the lower left rear effect member 621 is moved to the lower left rear initial position. Further, the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 moves to the upper initial position, and the upper left back side effect member 721 moves to the upper left back initial position. At this time, the upper left front-side effect member 761 and the lower left front-side effect member 661 are vertically integrated to form a column-shaped integral (having a predetermined character string) extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction). It becomes a state. At this time, the upper left rear effect member 721 is hidden behind the upper left front side effect member 761, and the lower left reverse effect member 621 is hidden behind the lower left front side effect member 661.

  In a predetermined gaming state (during production operation), the lower left front side effect member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is swung from the left standing initial position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 etc. Do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 22, the lower left front side effect member 661 is inclined to the right from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction), and overlaps the front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95.

  The upper left front side effect member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) is initially moved to the upper initial position by the upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like in a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 Move to the lower movable position below. At this time, as shown in FIG. 23, the upper left front-side effect member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the left from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and swings to the left tilt movable position. It is located in the upper vicinity of the lower left front side effect member 661 which has been dynamically displaced. Thereby, it is possible to perform rendering such that an integral rendering member including the upper left front side rendering member 761 and the lower left front side rendering member 661 collapses.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower left rear effect member 621 (and the lower left rear movable member 611) is moved from the lower left rear initial position to the lower left rear movable position by the lower left rear drive motor 603 or the like, the screen of the effect display device 95 Appears ahead of 95a. When the upper left rear effect member 721 (and the upper left rear movable member 711) is moved from the upper left rear initial position to the upper left rear movable position by the upper left rear drive motor 703 or the like, it appears in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. If the lower left rear effect member 621 or the upper left rear effect member 721 is moved laterally as the left lower front side effect member 661 swings to the left or right or the upper left front side effect member 761 moves up or down, It is possible to perform a rendering operation rich in a three-dimensional effect with depth.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. The left upper front side drive motor 737 and the like are detected on the condition that the left lower front side rendering member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is detected as being swingingly displaced to the left left tilt movable position by the left tilt movable position sensor 636c. The upper left front side effect member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) can be moved between the upper initial position and the lower movable position. On the other hand, when the upper left front side effect member 761 returns to the upper initial position and the lower left front side effect member 661 returns to the left standing initial position, the lower left front side drive motor 637 and the like is operated by the upper initial position sensor (not shown). The left lower front-side effect member 661 can be rocked and displaced from the left tiltable position to the left standing initial position, on condition that the member 761 is detected to move to the upper initial position. Thereby, the left upper front side effect member 761 and the lower left front side effect member 661 can be prevented from contacting each other, and the left lower side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 can be prevented from being broken.

[Configuration of right-side effect device]
Next, the right rendering device 800 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. The right side rendering device 800 is provided on the right side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, as shown in FIG. 6, and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. In addition, on the upper right side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, an upper right front side effect member 898 having a predetermined decoration is fixed. The upper right front-side effect member 898 is arranged above the right-side effect device 800 (lower right front-side effect member 891), and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. The right side rendering device 800, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the right back side base portion 801, the lower right back side movable member 821, the lower right back side effect member 831, the upper right back side movable member 841, and the upper right back side effect member And 851, the right front side base portion 861, the lower right front side movable member 881, and the lower right front side effect member 891.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the right back base portion 801 is formed in a plate shape extending in the vertical direction using a resin material. An elongated hole shaped guide hole 802 is formed on the lower side of the middle portion of the right back base portion 801. The guide hole 802 is formed to extend obliquely upward to the left with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 826 of the lower right rear side movable member 821 is slidably engaged with the guide hole 802. Thereby, the right back base portion 801 is relatively (not overlapped with the front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95) between the lower portion of the right back base portion 801 and the lower portion of the right front base portion 861. The initial position on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the lower right back initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the upper right of the lower right back initial position in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 The lower right rear movable member 821 is supported movably to the left and right between overlapping rendering positions (hereinafter, referred to as lower right rear movable position to distinguish from other rendering positions).

  A lower right rear side drive motor 803 for moving the lower right rear side movable member 821 is attached to the lower rear side of the right rear base portion 801. A lower right rear side drive mechanism 804 for moving the lower right rear side movable member 821 using the rotational driving force of the lower right rear side drive motor 803 is provided on the lower front side of the lower rear side base portion 801. The lower right rear side drive mechanism 804 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and is adapted to mesh with the rack gear portion 827 of the lower right rear side movable member 821. A lower right back side initial position sensor 805a is attached to the front middle portion right side of the right back side base portion 801 to detect that the lower right back movable member 821 has moved to the lower right back initial position. A lower right rear movable position sensor 805c is attached to the front middle portion left side of the right rear base portion 801 to detect that the lower right rear movable member 821 has moved to the lower right rear movable position. An upper guide portion 819 is formed on the front side of the middle portion of the right rear base portion 801 to guide the rear upper end of the lower right rear movable member 821 slidably. A gear cover 836 (see FIGS. 50 and 51) covering the front side of the lower right rear side drive mechanism 804 is attached to the lower front side of the right rear base portion 801.

  A link attachment portion 807 formed of a plurality of bosses is formed on the upper front side of the right back base portion 801. The link base member 811 (see FIG. 53) is attached to the link attachment portion 807, and the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b (see FIG. 53) are pivotably attached. The front end (upper end) of the left link arm member 816a is connected to the left link connection portion 846a of the upper right rear movable member 841 and the front end (upper end) of the right link arm member 816b is the right link connection of the upper right rear movable member 841 By being connected to the portion 846b, the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b form a parallel link mechanism. Thus, the right back base portion 801 is relatively right (does not overlap in front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95) between the upper portion of the right back base portion 801 and the upper portion of the right front base portion 861. Initial position (hereinafter referred to as the upper right back initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions), and a production position which is located on the lower left of the upper right back initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 Hereinafter, the upper right rear movable member 841 is supported so as to be movable leftward and rightward between the upper right rear movable position (referred to as the upper right rear movable position) in order to distinguish it from other presentation positions.

  An upper right rear side drive motor 808 for moving the upper right rear side movable member 841 is attached to the upper rear side of the right rear base portion 801. An upper right back side drive gear 809 for moving the upper right back side movable member 841 by swinging the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b on the upper front side of the right back side base portion 801 using the rotational driving force of the upper right back side drive motor 808 Is attached. The upper right rear side drive gear 809 meshes with the rack gear portion 817a of the left link arm member 816a. An upper right rear initial position sensor 810a is attached to the front upper right of the right rear base portion 801 and detects that the upper right rear movable member 841 has moved to the upper right rear initial position. An upper right rear movable position sensor 810 c is attached to the upper front left of the right rear base portion 801 to detect that the upper right rear movable member 841 has moved to the upper right rear movable position.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the link base member 811 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. A left link arm connecting portion 812a is formed on the left side of the link base member 811 to which the base end (lower end) of the left link arm member 816a is connected. On the right side of the link base member 811 is formed a right link arm connecting portion 812b to which the base end (lower end) of the right link arm member 816b is connected. The left link arm member 816a is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material. At the base end (lower end) of the left link arm member 816a, a rack gear portion 817a meshing with the upper right rear drive gear 809 of the right rear base portion 801 is formed. The right link arm member 816b is formed in a plate shape extending vertically by using a resin material. When the upper right rear movable member 841 moves to the upper right rear initial position to the middle part rear side of the right link arm member 816b, it is detected by the upper right rear initial position sensor 810a, and when the upper right rear movable member 841 moves to the upper right rear movable position A sensor detection unit 818 b detected by the movable position sensor 810 c is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right rear movable member 821 is formed of a resin material and is formed in a plate shape extending vertically. The lower right rear movable member 821 is coupled to the lower right rear rendering member 831 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right rear rendering member 831. The lower right rear effect member 831 and the lower right rear movable member 821 are supported movably to the left and right between the lower right rear initial position and the lower right rear movable position with respect to the right rear base portion 801. A lamp substrate 822 is attached to the front of the lower right rear movable member 821 so as to face the light transmitting portion 833 of the lower right rear rendering member 831. A plurality of light emitting elements 823 for emitting light from the light transmitting portion 833 of the lower right rear effect member 831 are disposed on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 822. A plate-like slide guide portion 826 engaged with the guide hole 802 of the right back side base portion 801 is attached to the rear side of the middle portion of the lower right back side movable member 821. A rack gear portion 827 meshing with the gear of the lower right rear side drive mechanism 804 of the right rear side base portion 801 is formed at the lower edge portion of the lower right rear side movable member 821. When the lower right rear movable member 821 moves to the lower right lower back initial position to the middle part rear side of the lower right rear movable member 821, it is detected by the lower right lower back initial position sensor 805a and the lower right rear movable member 821 is lower right back movable When moved to the position, a sensor detection unit 828 is formed which is detected by the lower right back movable position sensor 805c.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right rear effect member 831 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light transmitting portions 833 arranged vertically are formed on the front side of the lower right rear effect member 831 on which the predetermined decoration is performed. The light transmitting portion 833 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 823 disposed on the lamp substrate 822 of the lower right rear side movable member 821 so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right back movable member 841 is formed of a resin material and is formed in a plate shape extending vertically. The upper right rear movable member 841 is coupled to the upper right rear rendering member 851 so as to cover the rear side of the upper right rear rendering member 851. Thus, the upper right rear effect member 851 and the upper right rear movable member 841 are supported movably to the left and right between the upper right rear initial position and the upper right rear movable position with respect to the right rear base portion 801. A lamp substrate 842 is attached to the front of the upper right rear movable member 841 so as to face the light transmitting portion 853 of the upper right rear rendering member 851. A plurality of light emitting elements 843 for emitting light from the light transmitting portion 853 of the upper right rear effect member 851 are disposed on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 842. On the upper left rear side of the upper right rear movable member 841 is formed a left link connecting portion 846a to which the tip (upper end) of the left link arm member 816a is connected. A right side link connecting portion 846b is formed on the upper right rear side of the upper right rear side movable member 841 to which the tip (upper end) of the right side link arm member 816b is connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right rear effect member 851 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light transmitting portions 853 aligned vertically are formed on the front side of the upper right rear effect member 851 on which the predetermined decoration is performed. The light transmitting portion 853 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 843 disposed on the lamp substrate 842 of the upper right rear side movable member 841 so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the right front base portion 861 is formed in a plate shape extending in the vertical direction using a resin material. The right front base 861 is located in front of the right back base 801 using an upper boss 862 a formed on the upper rear of the right front base 861 and an intermediate boss 862 b formed on the rear of the middle part. Combined. Thus, the lower right rear effect member 831 and the lower right rear movable member 821 are disposed in the gap between the lower portion of the right front base portion 861 and the lower portion of the right rear base portion 801. In the gap between the upper portion of the right front base 861 and the upper portion of the right back base 801, the upper right rear effect member 851 and the upper right rear movable member 841 are disposed.

  A tilt support portion 864 rotatably supporting a tilt support member 871 connected to the lower right front-side movable member 881 is formed at the lower middle portion of the right front-side base portion 861. A plate-like guide wall 865 is attached to the front of the middle portion of the right front base 861. The upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 is formed to extend in a curved surface shape curved so that the upper side is convex. The guide piece portion 887 of the lower right front side movable member 881 is disposed close to the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 in a slidable manner. Thereby, the right front base 861 is distinguished from the initial position extending vertically (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display 95) on the front side of the right front base 861 (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions). Right initial position setting initial position), production position overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 by tilting leftward from the right position initial setting position (hereinafter, right tilt movable to distinguish from other production positions The lower right front side movable member 881 is supported so as to be able to swing and displace between the position (referred to as a position).

  A right-side standing initial position sensor 866a is attached on the rear side of the right front-side base portion 861 and right above the tilt support portion 864 to detect that the lower-right front-side movable member 881 is displaced to the right-side standing initial position. A right tilt movable position sensor 866c is attached to the upper left of the tilt support portion 864 on the rear side of the right front base portion 861 to detect that the lower right front movable member 881 is displaced to the right tilt movable position. A lower right front side drive motor 867 for moving the lower right front side movable member 881 is attached to the lower rear side of the right front side base portion 861. A lower right front side drive mechanism 868 is provided on the lower rear side of the right front side base portion 861 to swing and displace the lower right front side movable member 881 using the rotational driving force of the lower right front side drive motor 867. A decoration member 896 is attached to the lower front side of the right front base 861 so as to cover the base end (lower end) of the lower right front effect member 891 and the lower right front movable member 881 (see FIGS. 46 and 47). reference).

  The lower right front drive mechanism 868 includes a gear mechanism 869 rotationally driven by the lower right front drive motor 867 and a tilting support member 871. The tilt support member 871 is formed in a disk shape using a resin material, and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 864 of the right front side base portion 861. The front portion of the tilting support member 871 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 886 of the lower right front side movable member 881. An elongated hole-like engagement hole 872 is formed on the side of the tilting support member 871 so as to protrude to the side (downward) of the tilting support member 871. An engagement pin 869 a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 869 slidably engages with the engagement hole 872. As a result, the tilt support member 871 rotates in response to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 869, and swings and displaces the lower right front-side movable member 881 connected to the tilt support member 871. When the tilting support member 871 swings the right lower front movable member 881 to the right standing initial position on the side of the tilting support 871, it is detected by the right standing initial position sensor 866a, and the tilting support 871 is When the front movable member 881 is swung to the right tilt movable position, a sensor detection portion 873 is formed which is detected by the right tilt movable position sensor 866 c.

  The lower right front side movable member 881 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, using a resin material, as shown in FIGS. The lower right front side movable member 881 is coupled to the lower right front side effect member 891 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right front side effect member 891. Thus, the lower right front-side effect member 891 and the lower right front-side movable member 881 are supported so as to be able to swing and displace between the right-side standing initial position and the right-side tilting movable position with respect to the right front side base portion 861. A lamp substrate 882 is attached to the upper front side of the lower right front side movable member 881 so as to face the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front side effect member 891. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 882, a plurality of light emitting elements 883 that cause the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front side effect member 891 to emit light are disposed. On the lower rear side of the lower-right front-side movable member 881, a connecting shaft portion 886 is formed which is connected to the tilting support member 871 of the right-front-side base portion 861. A guide piece portion 887 which can be in sliding contact with the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 of the right front side base portion 861 is formed on the rear side of the middle portion of the lower right front side movable member 881.

  The lower-right front-side effect member 891 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material as shown in FIGS. A translucent portion 893 having the shape of a character is formed on the upper front side of the lower-right front-side effect member 891 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The light transmitting portion 893 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 883 disposed on the lamp substrate 882 of the lower right front side movable member 881 so as to emit light.

  In the right effect device 800 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (during effect standby), as shown in FIG. 43, the lower right front side effect member 891 is displaced to the right standing initial position. Also, the lower right reverse effect member 831 moves to the lower right lower initial position, and the upper right reverse effect member 851 moves to the upper right lower initial position. At this time, the upper right front-side effect member 898 (see FIG. 6) and the lower right front-side effect member 891 are integrated vertically and integrally, and have a columnar integral (a predetermined character string is extended in the vertical direction). ) The effect member is formed. At this time, the lower right front-side effect member 891 and the upper right rear-side effect member 851 are hidden behind the lower right front-side effect member 891.

  In the predetermined gaming state (during production operation), the lower right front side effect member 891 (and the lower right front side movable member 881) is moved from the right standing initial position by the lower right front side drive motor 867 etc. Swing and displace. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44, the lower right front-side effect member 891 leans leftward from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. Thereby, it is possible to perform rendering such that an integral rendering member including the upper right front side rendering member 898 and the lower right front side rendering member 891 collapses.

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the lower right rear effect member 831 (and the lower right rear movable member 821) is moved from the lower right rear initial position to the lower right rear movable position by the lower right rear drive motor 803 or the like, an effect is produced. It appears in front of the screen 95 a of the display device 95. The upper right rear effect member 851 (and the upper right rear movable member 841) appears in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 when moved from the upper right rear initial position to the upper right rear movable position by the upper right rear drive motor 808 or the like. If the lower right rear effect member 831 or the upper right rear effect member 851 is moved to the left or right according to the lower right front side effect member 891 swinging to the left or right, an operation rich in depth with a three-dimensional effect It is possible to Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects.

[Configuration of lower side rendering device]
Next, the lower effect device 900 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 58 to 69. The lower effect device 900 is provided below the center ornament 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the lower effect device 900 includes a lower base portion 901, a first back movable support portion 921, a second back movable support portion 931, and a first back effect member 941. The second back-side effect member 946, the first front-side movable support portion 951, the second front-side movable support portion 961, the first front-side effect member 971, and the second front-side effect member 981 are configured.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the lower base portion 901 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. A rail-shaped guide rail portion 902 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the front side of the middle portion of the lower base portion 901. The guide rail portion 902 slidably engages with the guide groove portion 922 of the first back side movable support portion 921. Thereby, the lower base portion 901 is distinguished from the lower initial position (which does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the lower base portion 901 (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions) In order to distinguish the effect position from the lower effect position (hereinafter referred to as another effect position), the effect position is located above the lower initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95. And the first back side movable support portion 921 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A stopper portion 903 in the shape of a rectangular protrusion is formed on the upper front side of the center of the lower base portion 901.

  A movable support drive motor 904 for moving the first back movable support 921 is attached to the rear side of the left end of the lower base 901. A movable support drive mechanism 905 for moving the first back movable support 921 using the rotational drive force of the movable support drive motor 904 is provided on the left side and rear side of the lower base 901. The movable support drive mechanism 905 is configured to have a plurality of gears (gears) including a pinion gear 906. The pinion gear 906 of the movable support drive mechanism 905 meshes with the rack gear 924 of the first back movable support 921 and is a rack and pinion mechanism provided to straddle the lower base 901 and the first back movable support 921. Configure. A movable position sensor detection unit 907 is formed on the upper right front side of the lower base portion 901. The movable position sensor detection unit 907 is detected by the lower movable position sensor 908c when the first back movable support unit 921 moves to the lower movable position. A lower initial position sensor 908a is attached to the lower left front side of the lower base portion 901 to detect that the first back movable support 921 has moved to the lower initial position.

  The left arm member 911 is attached to the front of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be able to swing in the vertical direction. The left arm member 911 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material. On the tip side of the left arm member 911, an elongated hole-like left engagement hole 912 extending along the extension direction of the left arm member 911 is formed. The left engagement pin 926 of the first back movable support 921 is slidably engaged with the left engagement hole 912. As a result, the front end side of the left arm member 911 is connected to the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The left arm member 911 is attached to the left end front side of the lower base portion 901 together with the left biasing spring 913. The left biasing spring 913 is configured using a torsion coil spring, and applies a biasing force in a direction in which the left arm member 911 swings upward.

  The right arm member 916 is attached to the front of the right end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be vertically swingable. The right arm member 916 is formed symmetrically with the left arm member 911 using a resin material. An elongated right engaging hole 917 extending in the extension direction of the right arm member 916 is formed on the distal end side of the right arm member 916. The right engagement pin 927 of the first back side movable support 921 is slidably engaged with the right engagement hole 917. Thus, the tip end side of the right arm member 916 is connected to the lower right back side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The right arm member 916 is attached to the front end of the lower base portion 901 along with the right biasing spring 918. The right biasing spring 918 is configured using a torsion coil spring, and applies a biasing force in a direction in which the right arm member 916 swings upward. The left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction so as to extend toward the center side of the lower base portion 901, and the first back movable support portion 921 is vertically arranged with respect to the lower base portion 901 It is configured to swing up and down as it moves.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the first back side movable support portion 921 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. The first back side movable support 921 is coupled to the second back side movable support 931 so as to cover the rear side of the second back side movable support 931. Thus, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are vertically movably supported between the lower initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the lower base portion 901. . A groove-shaped guide groove portion 922 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the middle portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The guide groove portion 922 slidably engages with the guide rail portion 902 of the lower base portion 901. A groove-shaped stopper groove 923 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the central portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The stopper groove 923 is configured to receive the stopper 903 of the lower base 901. Thus, the stopper portion 903 restricts movement (downward) beyond the lower initial position of the first back side movable support portion 921 and exceeds the lower movable position of the first back side movable support portion 921 (upper Control movement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like from coming off from the lower base portion 901, and to prevent the lower effect device 900 from being broken.

  On the left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921, a rack gear portion 924 is formed in which the tooth portion is directed leftward and extends in the vertical direction. The rack gear portion 924 meshes with the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901 disposed on the left side of the rack gear portion 924. On the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support 921, an initial position sensor detection unit 925 is formed, which is detected by the lower initial position sensor 908 a when the first back side movable support 921 moves to the lower initial position. A left engagement pin 926 slidably engaged with the left engagement hole 912 of the left arm member 911 is formed on the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. A right engagement pin 927 slidably engaged with the right engagement hole 917 of the right arm member 916 is formed on the lower right rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the second back side movable support portion 931 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. A first back side rotation support portion 932 is formed on the upper left front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The first back side rotation support portion 932 is an initial position where the first back side effect member 941 is hidden behind the first front side effect member 971 in the gap between the second back side movable support portion 931 and the first front side movable support portion 951 Hereinafter, the first back side initial position is referred to in order to distinguish it from the other initial positions), and the effect position which can be viewed from the front by rotating clockwise (as viewed from the front) from the first back side initial position The first back side rendering member 941 is rotatably movably supported between the second back side movable position and the first back side movable position to be distinguished from the rendering position. The second back side rotation support portion 933 is formed on the lower right front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The second back side rotation support portion 933 is an initial position where the second back side effect member 946 is hidden behind the second front side effect member 981 in the gap between the second back side movable support portion 931 and the first front side movable support portion 951 Hereinafter, the second back side initial position is referred to in order to distinguish it from other initial positions), and the effect position which can be viewed from the front by rotating clockwise (as viewed from the front) from the second back side initial position The second back side rendering member 946 is rotatably movably supported between the second back side movable position and the second back side movable position in order to be distinguished from the second position.

  A back side rotation drive motor 934 for moving the first back side rendering member 941 and the second back side rendering member 946 is attached to the upper right front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. A back side rotation drive mechanism 935 for rotating the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 using the rotational driving force of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is provided on the upper back side of the second back side movable support portion 931 Be The back side rotation drive mechanism 935 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and rotates the first back side effect member 941 between the first back side initial position and the first back side movable position, and at the same time, the second back side effect member 946 is pivoted between the second back side initial position and the second back side movable position.

  A first back side initial position sensor 936a is attached to the left front side of the second back side movable support portion 931 to detect rotational movement of the first back side effect member 941 to the first back side initial position. A first back side movable position sensor 936 c is attached to the upper front side of the second back side movable support portion 931 to detect that the first back side rendering member 941 has rotationally moved to the first back side movable position. A lower movable position sensor 908 c is attached to the lower right rear side of the second rear movable support 931 to detect movement of the first rear movable support 921 to the lower movable position. The lower movable position sensor 908 c is exposed rearward through an opening (not shown) formed in the lower right portion of the first rear movable support portion 921.

  As shown to FIG. 66 (A), the 1st back side presentation member 941 is formed in the plate shape to which the star-shaped decoration was given using the resin material. A first sensor detection unit 942 is formed at the base end of the first backside effect member 941. The first sensor detection portion 942 is detected by the first backside initial position sensor 936a when the first backside effect member 941 is rotationally moved to the first backside initial position. A second sensor detection unit 943 is formed in an intermediate portion of the first back-side effect member 941. The second sensor detection portion 943 is detected by the first back-side movable position sensor 936c when the first back side effect member 941 is rotationally moved to the first back side movable position. The second back side rendering member 946 is formed of a resin material in a plate shape with a star-shaped decoration similarly to the first back side rendering member 941.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the first front movable support portion 951 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. The first front movable support 951 is formed on an upper boss 952 formed on the upper rear of the first movable support 951, an intermediate boss 953 formed on the middle rear, and a lower rear. The lower boss portion 954 is used to be coupled to the front of the second rear movable support portion 931. Thereby, the first back side rendering member 941 and the second back side rendering member 946 are disposed in the gap between the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second back side movable support portion 931. The first front movable support 951 is coupled to the second front movable support 961 so as to cover the rear side of the second front movable support 961. As a result, the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961, the first back movable support 921 and the second back movable support 931 have lower initial positions relative to the lower base 901. It is supported so as to be vertically movable between the lower movable position.

  On the lower front side of the first front movable support 951, a guide rail 956 extending in the left and right direction is formed. The guide rail portion 956 supports the slide guide portion 976 of the first front-side effect member 971 so as to slide in the left-right direction. Thus, the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 are in an initial position at which the first front effect member 971 abuts on the second front effect 981 on the front side of the second front movable support 961. Hereinafter, the first front side initial position is referred to in order to distinguish from other initial positions), and the presentation position away from the first front side initial position to the left (hereinafter referred to as the first front side movable position to distinguish from the other presentation positions And the first front-side effect member 971 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the second front movable support portion 961 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally from the resin material. On the front side of the middle portion of the second front side movable support portion 961, a back side decoration portion 962 having a star-shaped decoration like the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 is formed. An elongated hole shaped guide hole 966 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the upper right portion of the second front movable support portion 961. The upper second connection pin 984 of the second front-side effect member 981 is slidably inserted into the guide hole 966. Thus, the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 are in an initial position at which the second front rendering member 981 abuts on the first front rendering member 971 on the front side of the second front movable support 961. Hereinafter, the second front side initial position is referred to in order to distinguish it from the other initial positions), and the presentation position away from the second front side initial position to the right (hereinafter referred to as the second front side movable position to distinguish it from the other presentation positions) And the second front side effect member 981 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  A front side drive motor 967 for moving the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 is attached to the center rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961. A front side drive mechanism 968 for moving the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 using the rotational drive force of the front side drive motor 967 is provided on the rear side of the central portion of the second front side movable support portion 961. The front side drive mechanism 968 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and meshes with the first rack gear portion 978 of the first front side movable support portion 951 and meshes with the second rack gear portion 988 of the second front side effect member 981. It has become. The front side drive mechanism 968 moves the first front side effect member 971 in the left-right direction between the first front side initial position and the first front side movable position, and at the same time, the second front side effect member 981 is moved to the second front side initial position. 2 Move in the left and right direction between the front side movable position.

  A first front side initial position sensor 969a that detects that the first front side effect member 971 has moved to the first front side initial position is attached to the lower rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961 at the right. A first front movable position sensor 969c that detects that the first front effect member 971 has moved to the first front movable position is attached to the lower rear of the second front movable support portion 961 at the left. A front side biasing spring 965 is attached to the upper left rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961. The front side biasing spring 965 is configured using a tension coil spring, and applies a biasing force in the direction in which the second front side effect member 981 moves to the second front side initial position (leftward).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the first front-side effect member 971 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined decoration using a resin material. The first guide member 973 is connected to the rear of the first front-side effect member 971 via the upper and lower first connection pins 974 and 975. The first guide member 973 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction using a resin material, and the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 are formed by the upper and lower first connection pins 974 and 975. It is placed in the gap. At a lower edge portion of the first guide member 973, a slide guide portion 976 supported slidably on the guide rail portion 956 of the first front movable support portion 951 is formed. At an upper edge portion of the first guide member 973, a first rack gear portion 978 that meshes with the gear of the front drive mechanism 968 of the second front movable support 961 is formed. When the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side initial position to the front side of the first guide member 973, it is detected by the first front side initial position sensor 969a, and when the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side movable position A sensor detection unit 979 detected by the first front-side movable position sensor 969 c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the second front-side effect member 981 is formed in a plate shape to which a predetermined decoration is applied using a resin material. When the first front-side effect member 971 moves to the first front-side initial position and the second front-side effect member 981 moves to the second front-side initial position, the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 abut Integral to form an integral decorative shape (eg, a shape resembling an animal). The second guide member 983 is connected to the rear of the second front-side effect member 981 via the upper and lower second connection pins 984 and 985. The second guide member 983 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction using a resin material, and the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 are formed by the upper and lower second connection pins 984 and 985. It is placed in the gap. The upper second connection pin 984 is slidably inserted into the guide hole 966 of the second front movable support 961. At a lower edge portion of the second guide member 983, a second rack gear portion 988 which meshes with the gear of the front drive mechanism 968 of the second front movable support 961 is formed.

  In the lower effect device 900 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (during effect standby), as shown in FIG. 58, the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961; The first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 move to the lower side initial position, and the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 move to the first back side initial position and the second back side initial position. The first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 move to the first front side initial position and the second front side initial position. At this time, when the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 contact and integrate, and viewed from the front, the second front-side movable support by the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 The front of the back side decoration portion 962 of the portion 961 is covered. At this time, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are hidden behind the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981. At this time, as shown also in FIG. 59, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are attached to the left as the first back movable support 921 relatively moves to the lower lower initial position. It is in a state of being swung downward against the biasing force of the biasing spring 913 and the right biasing spring 918.

  In the predetermined gaming state (during production operation), as shown in FIG. 60, the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961, the first rear movable support 921 and the second rear movable support 931 is moved from the lower initial position to the upper lower movable position by the movable support drive motor 904 or the like. At this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are swung upward as the first back side movable support portion 921 relatively moves to the upper lower movable position. At this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 use the biasing force of the left biasing spring 913 and the right biasing spring 918 to move the force to move upward with respect to the first back side movable support portion 921. Add.

  With the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 and the first back movable support 921 and the second back movable support 931 moved to the lower movable position, the front drive motor 967 or the like The first front-side effect member 971 moves from the first front-side initial position to the left first front-side movable position, and the second front-side effect member 981 moves from the second front-side initial position to the right second front-side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61, the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 are left and right, and the gap between the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 The back side decorative portion 962 of the second front side movable support portion 961 is in a visible state.

  With the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 moved to the first front-side initial position and the second front-side initial position, the first back-side effect member 941 is the first back-side initial The rotational movement from the position to the first back side movable position is performed, and the second back side rendering member 946 is rotationally moved from the second back side initial position to the second back side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62, the first back side effect member 941 appears above the second front side movable support portion 961 and becomes visible from the front. At this time, the second back side effect member 946 appears below the second front side movable support portion 961 so that it can be viewed from the front. In this state, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 and the back side decorative portion 962 of the second front side movable support portion 961 are integrated to form an integral decorative shape in which a plurality of stars are arranged. Be done.

  The first back side rendering member 941 and the second back side rendering member 946 have shapes different from each other. Therefore, with the first front movable support 951 and the second front movable support 961 and the first back movable support 921 and the second back movable support 931 moved to the lower movable position, the first back effect member When the 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved, the center of gravity of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like is moved and easily displaced in the left and right direction. As a result, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 may be displaced in the left-right direction and disengaged from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. In this embodiment, even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved by the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921, The lateral displacement of the back side movable support portion 921 and the like is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and disengaging from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the failure of the lower effect device 900.

  When the first back side movable support portion 921 or the like moves to the lower side movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is at the tip end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911 The right engagement pin 927 abuts on the tip end of the right engagement hole 917 in the right arm member 916. Then, since the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 become more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are obtained when the first back side movable support 921 and the like are moved to the lower side movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates and moves, the displacement of the first back movable support 921 and the like in the left and right direction is effectively suppressed. At this time, a force to displace the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like is easily transmitted to the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916, but the biasing force of the left biasing spring 913 and the right biasing spring 918 Thus, the displacement of the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 in the left-right direction is suppressed, whereby the displacement of the first back side movable support portion 921 or the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. In addition, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move upward beyond the lower movable position and are prevented from being detached from the lower base portion 901. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the failure of the lower rendering device 900 more reliably.

[Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to gaming, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, peripheral boards and each An I / O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals to and from the device, and a random number generation circuit 105 which operates as a separate system from program processing (software random numbers) by the main CPU 101 and generates predetermined random numbers (internal random numbers) And a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 is configured to execute main control related to game progression in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 102. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out. A WDT circuit for recovering to a normal state, a CTC circuit for enabling generation of a real time interrupt and time measurement, etc. are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processing related to main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information and the like from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply substrate 450. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of the power shutdown when the power shutdown occurs. The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power failure based on the information of the backup area.

  The random number generation circuit 105 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (internal random numbers) according to a predetermined rule by updating once based on the clock signal (one clock) from the clock circuit (one clock and one random number generation method). The initial value of the built-in random number is a numerical value calculated by a predetermined calculation based on the ID number (specific identification information assigned to each microcomputer) of the main control microcomputer 110, and is changed at each system reset. This built-in random number constitutes a part of the random number per special symbol used for the lottery of the special symbol to be described later.

  Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the special winning port switch 76, etc., and via the I / O port circuit 104. Detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101. In addition, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 81, the second special symbol display device 82, the first special view reserve lamp 83, the second special view reserve lamp 84, the normal symbol display device 85 and the common view reserve lamp The control signal from the main CPU 101 is electrically connected via the I / O port circuit 104. The control signal from the main CPU 101 is electrically connected to the ordinary electric service solenoid 68 and the special electric service solenoid 78. Send to various display means and various solenoids.

  Communication between the main control substrate 100 and the effect control substrate 200 is possible only in a single direction from the main control substrate 100 to the effect control substrate 200, and various types of effects from the main control substrate 100 to the effect control substrate 200 are provided. The presentation control command of is sent. It is not possible to transmit data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and it is not possible to request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 has a sub main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effects based on effect control commands from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores effect control programs and various data, etc., a work area serving as a temporary storage area, A presentation comprising a RAM 203 functioning as a buffer memory, an I / O port circuit 204 for inputting and outputting signals between peripheral boards and devices, and a serial communication circuit 205 for inputting and outputting serial data. A control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 is mounted, and the sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the clock circuit for dividing the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate the internal system clock is reset to the effect control board 200, and the sub main CPU 201 is reset when it malfunctions or runs out. These circuits include a WDT circuit that recovers to a normal state, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, and an interrupt controller that starts up various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit. Are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to generate an image and sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 291 in effect control processing based on the effect control command from the main control board 100. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 292, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to enable two-way communication, and while an image control command relating to an image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, this image A response command (ACK command) indicating that the control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 291 and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) via the serial communication circuit. In the present example, serial transmission of clock synchronous type is adopted between the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 291, and transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 291 incorporates an LED driver (not shown) that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving the LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. By switching on / off, drive current is supplied to or cut off from the effect lamp LP, and control is performed to turn on or turn off the effect lamp LP.

  Furthermore, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the motor driver 292, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) to the motor driver 292 via the I / O port circuit 204. The motor driver 292 turns on / off a switch in the circuit on the basis of a drive control signal for driving the accessory that is transmitted from the effect control board 200, thereby producing each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, A drive current is supplied to or cut off from the motor M of the left upper effect device 700, the right effect device 800, and the lower effect device 900, and control is performed to operate each effect device.

  The image control board 300 has a sub-sub-CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing relating to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a program ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, etc. RAM 303 which functions as an area or buffer memory, VDP 304 which generates image data according to the contents of presentation based on the control signal acquired from sub sub CPU 301, and generates acoustic data according to the contents of presentation based on control signal acquired from sub sub CPU 301 And a sound source IC 305. The VDP 304 is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM 306 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-sub CPU, processes the image into image signals (image data), and generates an image display device DS (effect display Transmission to the device 95 and the secondary display device 561). The VPD 304 is connected to a high-speed VRAM 307 used for developing and processing the image data read from the image ROM 306. The sound source IC 305 reads the sound data stored in the voice ROM 308 according to the instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the generated sound data to the speaker 8 via an amplifier (digital amplifier) not shown. .

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bi-directional communication, and is a control for driving the prize ball payout unit 35 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to dispense the prize balls. The ball feed mechanism 21 and the launch mechanism 22 are synchronously driven based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 12 to control the launch of the gaming ball.

  Although not shown in detail, power supply substrate 450 is a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control substrate based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility on the game island, and a backup power supply. A backup power supply circuit for generating (VBB) and a power cut-off monitor circuit for monitoring a power cut-off due to a voltage drop are provided, and they are used for electronic and electric parts such as control boards and gaming machines. Supply necessary power. The power supply substrate 450 is connected to a power supply switch for activating a power supply circuit, and when the power supply switch is turned on, assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power supply substrate A predetermined power supply is supplied from the normal power supply circuit 450 to each control board or the like. The power supply substrate 450 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the gaming island has been cut off, and when the power is off is detected, a power off signal (NMI signal) notifying that is the main control board 100 , And the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied from the power supply device on the gaming island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. The power supply substrate 450 is also connected with a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control substrate 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 450.

  In the present embodiment, as the configuration of the effect control of the pachinko gaming machine, the configuration in which the effect control substrate 200 and the image control substrate 300 are provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one (production) control board is equipped with a sub main CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effects, a sub sub CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects, and a VDP that generates image data according to the contents of effects The configuration may be different. Further, for example, when the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 or three or more control boards are provided, the sound source IC for generating sound data along the contents of the effect is mounted on the effect control board 200. The sound source IC may be mounted on the third control board (in the case of three or more), and the structure of the effect control of the pachinko gaming machine can be appropriately changed. .

[Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly, the main control board 100 / the effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 71 additionally.

Main control board
As shown in FIG. 71, the main control board 100 is a ball entry judging means 110, a game lottery random number generating means 120, a hold control means 130, a prior judgment means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, It includes a demonstration effect setting means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric role control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission / reception means 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are constituted by the main CPU 101, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the hardware such as the electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional expression of

  The ball entrance judging means 110 enters the ball of the game ball to each winning opening on the basis of detection signals from the first starting opening switch 61, the second starting opening switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, and the special winning opening switch 76. judge.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit 105 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol described later to this to add a random number per special symbol used for the special lottery Generate In addition, the game lottery random number generation means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to make a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of soft random number per special symbol, A special symbol per symbol special symbol used to determine a winning symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as a stop symbol of a special symbol Special symbol for determining the initial value and end value of a symbol random number per symbol special symbol per symbol special symbol The initial value random number per pattern, the special pattern variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the random number per ordinary symbol for use in the lottery of the normal symbol, the initial value and the end value of the random number per ordinary symbol The initial value random number per normal symbol to decide, the normal symbol variation pattern random number etc to be used for the selection of the variation pattern of the normal symbol That. The software random numbers are updated once each time the timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random number is the remaining time of the interrupt cycle while the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing) Update using.

  The suspension control means 130 includes a special symbol suspension control means 131 and a regular symbol suspension control means 132.

  The special symbol holding control means 131 is a random number value for a special symbol, which is a random number for drawing a special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 60 or the second starting opening 65. The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol retention control means 131 is a main information storage means by combining the operation retention ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to the predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) respectively with the entering sequence of the retention balls. Temporarily store the 180 first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area.

  In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), the hold 2 storage area (2 A first pending storage area), a pending 3 storage area (third pending storage area), and a pending 4 storage area (fourth pending storage area) are provided. Each pending storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a special symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set of operation pending ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage area, while holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage Digested in order of area (first-in-first-out principle). In addition, when the holding ball information of the holding 1 storage area is digested, the holding ball information stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is shifted to the lower number storage area, Clear the contents of the pending 4 storage area to zero.

  Also, the special symbol suspension control means 131 is a first special symbol suspension ball number counter for counting the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol, a second special for counting the operation suspension ball number of the second special symbol It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, and one operation holding ball is digested, as update processing of the operation holding ball number of the special symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  Also, when the special symbol suspension control means 131 updates the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command including update information of the number of suspension balls is referred to as "symbol memory number command" ) Are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. This one command includes information on both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, as a general rule, although operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entering the ball, in this embodiment, the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed over the first special symbol Since the so-called priority digest is adopted, while the operation reserve ball relating to the second special symbol game is present, the operation reserve relating to the second special symbol game regardless of the presence of the operation reserve ball relating to the first special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest the spheres.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a random number value per symbol, a random number per symbol, a symbol random number per symbol, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, which is a lottery random number relating to a normal symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the operation gate 70. The random number value is acquired, and the random number value is normally managed as the operation pending ball information of the symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 combines the normal holding symbol with the normal ball holding storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combining the normal holding symbol with the ball holding order up to a predetermined upper limit number (4). Temporarily store. Also, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal operating symbol holding ball is acquired as an update process of the number of operating normal symbol holding balls, and one operating holding ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  The prior determination means 135 performs the prior determination of the advance notice effect for the operation reserved ball, when the operation reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired at a predetermined prior determined timing. Here, with pre-reading advance notice effect, prior judgment such as a lottery is performed on the undivided operation holding ball in which the variable display of the special symbol is on hold, and the judgment result is notified to the player in advance. It is an effect to notify to. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) is waiting for each operation, and when the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric support function is not activated, (2) is waiting for each operation, and When the support function acquires the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol while operating, (3) when the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, either of the conditions It is time to be satisfied. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation pending ball acquired this time from the special symbol suspension storage area of the main information storage means 180, and pre-judges the preliminary judgment of the success or failure lottery ), Pre-determination of symbol symbol lottery (pattern pre-determination), and pre-determination of symbol variation pattern lottery (variation pattern pre-determination) are sequentially executed. The prior determination unit 135 sequentially generates effect control commands including information on the result of the prior determination of the success or failure, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141, special symbol stop symbol determination means 412, and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143. Special symbol lottery processing means 140, random symbol value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (pending 1 storage area) in the special symbol suspension storage area when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a symbol per special symbol The random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out and stored in the special symbol conformity determination region, the special symbol symbol determination region, and the special symbol variation pattern determination region of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is established, as an example, (1) that it is not in the big hit or small hit, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change (3) When all the conditions of the action holding ball exist in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and as a result, the special symbol can start changing It is judged that there is.

  The special symbol compliance determination means 141 reads out the random value per special symbol from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the compliance determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and off Decide what to do. The result of this lottery is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, outlying data “00H”), and used in the subsequent processing It is cleared at the time of the stop of the change of the special symbol. The special symbol propriety judging means 141 holds a special symbol propriety lottery table which is referred to at the time of this propriety judgment.

  Here, FIG. 72 is a view schematically showing the special symbol acceptance lottery table, in which (A) is a table referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability state). It is a table to be referenced. In this special symbol hit / lottery table, the random symbol value for the special symbol, the big hit, the small hit, and the judgment result of the loss are associated, and the hit probability and the big hit probability of the big hit according to the associated range setting. Is determined. As can be understood from FIG. 72, in the special symbol gaming success or failure lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), a big hit is made only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of the big hit is expanded, and it becomes a big hit not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the lottery probability of the big hit is varied from the low probability state (164/65536) to the high probability state (1640/65536). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is equal. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a higher probability of being a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, in the success or failure lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit may not be present.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Do. The special symbol stop symbol judging means 142 is a symbol table per first special symbol referred to when deciding the stop symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the lottery is a big hit It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 73 (A) is a view schematically showing an example of a symbol table per first special symbol. This first special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function of special symbol and variation time shortening function, big winning opening 64 The operation patterns of are respectively associated. In this table, the stop symbols "2" to "11" of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of the big hit.

  Specifically, in the symbols "2", "3", "4" and "5", the symbol group A (12R specific short-time fixed symbol 1) is a symbol "6", "7", "8", A symbol group B (2R specified short-term symbol) is associated with “9”, and a symbol group C (12R normal-time short symbol) is associated with symbols “10” and “11”, respectively. "Specific symbol" is a symbol that activates the probability change function after the end of the special game, and "normal symbol" is a symbol that does not activate the probability change function after the end of the special game (described later) The same applies to the symbol group of the second special symbol).

  The symbol group A is a specific symbol indicating the so-called "perhaps per change" which shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the special symbol state (high probability state), and the probability variation function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurrence And fluctuation time reduction function, and power chew support function are provided. The prescribed number of rounds of special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group B shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) although the opening count and opening time of the special winning opening 64 are different compared to the above-mentioned "certain hit". This is a specific symbol indicating a so-called "sudden probability variation hit", and is provided with a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function of a special symbol, and a power chute support function until the next big hit occurrence. The prescribed number of special games is 2 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  The symbol group C is a normal symbol showing a so-called "normal hit" which shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the normal state (low probability state), and a predetermined number of times after the special game ends (50 times in this example) Limited to the special symbol variation time reduction function and electronic chew support function are provided. The prescribed number of rounds of special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, symbol determination by random numbers per special symbol is omitted, and symbol "12" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol. A symbol group G (specially-designed symbol) is associated with the symbol "12". In the case of a small hit, it does not become a trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power chute support function), and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery. In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "1" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  Then, FIG. 73 (B) is a figure which shows typically an example of a 2nd special symbol per symbol table. This second special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function and variation time shortening function of special symbol, big winning opening 64 The operation patterns of are respectively associated. In this table, the stop symbols "13" to "22" of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol groups D (16R specific short-period fixed symbol symbols) are for symbol "13", "14", "15" and "16", and symbol group E is for symbol "17" and "18". A symbol group F (2R normal short time limited symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “19”, “20”, “21”, and “22” (2R specified short period fixed symbol).

  The symbol group D is a specific symbol indicating the so-called "perhaps per change", which shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the special symbol state (high probability state), and the probability variation function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurrence And fluctuation time reduction function, and power chew support function are provided. The prescribed number of special games is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group E shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) although the opening count and opening time of the special winning opening 64 are different compared to the above-mentioned "certain hit". This is a specific symbol indicating a so-called "sudden probability variation hit", and is provided with a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function of a special symbol, and a power chute support function until the next big hit occurrence. The prescribed number of special games is 2 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  The symbol group F is a normal symbol showing a so-called "normal hit" which shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the normal state (low probability state), and a predetermined number of times after the special game ends (50 times in this example) Limited to the special symbol variation time reduction function and electronic chew support function are provided. The prescribed number of special games is 2 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, symbol determination by random numbers per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol "23" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol. A symbol group H (specially-designed symbol) is associated with the symbol "23". In the case of a small hit, it does not become a trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power Chuo support function), and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery (each function Except when winning a small hit when it is a fluctuation that will end the operation of In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "1" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  Here, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 165 determines the game state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group pertaining to the big hit, and the game state after the special game. Switch. As the gaming state, the special symbol time saving state and the electric chow support state are continued until the variation number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined ending condition number, for example, 50 times, counting from the end of the special game. However, at the same time when transitioning to the special symbol's positive variation state, as long as the positive variation state continues, the special symbol's time saving status and the electric chow support status are also continued. That is, the definite variation state of the special symbol is continued until the next big hit. At this time, in the special symbol in the certain variation state, the lottery probability of the big hit is changed from the normal low probability to the high probability, and the high probability state more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. In the time saving state of the special symbol, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. The electric chew support state (ball entry easy state) is to the second starting opening 65 by activating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the open time extension function of the ordinary electric character. It is in the state where the ball entry ease is improved. When the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state. When the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol is activated, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the open time extension function of the normal motor-operated part 67 is activated, the open time of the normal motor-operated part 67 is in a state of being extended from the normal state.

  In addition, the gaming state control means 165, when the result of the lottery is a big hit or small hit, based on the type of symbol groups A to G (symbol group G is a symbol group related to a small hit not shown), a special game While determining the later variation pattern selection state, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is switched. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern table to be described later. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is at the end of the special game or when the number of terminations of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern selection state, there are a normal variation pattern selection state, a probability variation variation pattern selection state, a short time variation pattern selection state, and the like. Here, the normal fluctuation pattern selection state is a state in which the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state. The probability change variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the probability variation change pattern table selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. The short time variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the short time variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state of the special symbol. In addition, the gaming state control means 165 generates a production control command (referred to as a "gaming state designation command") including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects any variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the acceptance lottery.

  FIG. 74 is a view schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol. Here, (A1) and (A2) in the figure are normal variation pattern tables, (B1) and (B2) in the figures are probability variation variation pattern tables, (C1) and (C2) in the figures are time variation patterns table It is. In each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selectivity” is indicated, but in actuality, the judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. It is premised that the variation time of various variation patterns is determined for each variation pattern as the termination condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed in the variation time. Defined as Specifically, the fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 have fluctuation times of 5 seconds and 10 seconds, respectively, and can take a non-reach fluctuation mode as the fluctuation process of the symbol. The variation patterns P3 and P4 have variation times of 20 seconds and 40 seconds, respectively, and can take a variation mode of normal reach (N reach) as a variation process of the symbol. The variation patterns P5 and P6 have variation times of 60 seconds and 90 seconds, respectively, and can take a variation mode with a reach as a variation process of the pattern, and eventually develop into a super reach (SP reach). Here, in any of the fluctuation pattern tables, when the result of the acceptance lottery is a big hit, the non-reach fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 are not selected, and only the fluctuation patterns with reach P3 to P6 are selected. Ru. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the selection rate of the non-reach fluctuation patterns P1, P2 is relatively high. Here, in comparison with the normal fluctuation pattern table for disconnection, the selection ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern P1 (variation time: 5 seconds) is relative in the probability variation fluctuation pattern table for departure and the time variation pattern table for disconnection. At the point of becoming higher, the average fluctuation time tends to be shortened. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns are described as an example, but there are actually 100 or more types of variation patterns.

  Moreover, in the above description, the fluctuation pattern table for outliers is expressed as a single table in any case, but when the result of the success or failure lottery is out, the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol ( Different fluctuation pattern tables may be selected according to 0 to 4). In other words, by using the variation pattern table according to the number of actuation reserved balls of the special symbol, the larger the number of actuation pending balls is, the higher the ratio for which the relatively short variation time is selected. It is possible to increase the rate at which relatively long fluctuation times are selected. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a big hit, by using the variation pattern table according to the symbol or pattern group pertaining to the big hit, according to the type of big hit, the sense of expectation of the big hit is enhanced in effect The rate at which the variation time is selected may be made different.

  In addition, after the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, in order to instruct the effect control substrate 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, communication with the effect control substrate 200 is normally performed. A production control command ("Variation added symbol information specification command") including a production control command (referred to as a "communication inspection command") for checking whether or not the item is added, and fluctuation added symbol information (information for adding / subtracting fluctuation time) ), Production control command including fluctuation pattern information (called “variation pattern specification command”), “character production number specification command” including character production number information (pattern group and gaming state information), etc. (Hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as “variation start command”), and this is a command of the main information storage unit 180. And stores it in the pay area.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes an ordinary symbol suitability determination means 146, an ordinary symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination means 148. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random symbol value per normal symbol and the normal symbol variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol storage area when the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, The main symbol storage area 180 is stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively.

  The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the yes / no determination, and the determination result corresponds to either hit or off. decide. The result of the success or failure lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds the normal symbol success / loss lottery table to be referred to in this success / failure lottery, and in a normal state (low probability state), for example, a hit normally with a probability of "160/283" For example, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol with reference to the symbol success lottery table, for example, with reference to the normal symbol success lottery table which will be hit with the probability of "282/283", execute the regular lottery of the normal symbol Do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined hit symbol if the result of the success or failure lottery is a hit, but assigns a predetermined lost symbol if it is an offset. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads out the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation of the normal symbol in the normal state. In (1), a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (for example, 7 kinds of "4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, 10 seconds" are uniformly selected, respectively). On the other hand, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected in the time-shortened state of the ordinary symbol (the ball entering state).

  The demonstration effect setting means 150 displays a big hit start demonstration effect and a big hit end demonstration displayed on the effect display device 95 or the like during the special game according to the type of the determined symbol group when the result of the success or failure lottery is a big hit. Determine the demonstration presentation time for the presentation. Also, the demonstration effect setting unit 150, as a special game demonstration setting process, an effect control command ("big hit start demonstration command") instructing execution of the big hit start demonstration effect and effect control instructing the execution of the big hit end demonstration effect Generate a command ("big hit end demo command").

  In addition, the demonstration effect time setting means 150 is a demonstration effect time according to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 95 etc. during the small hit game when the result of the acceptance lottery is a small hit. Decide. Further, the demonstration effect setting unit 150 executes, as demonstration setting processing of the small hit game, an effect control command ("small hit start demonstration command") instructing execution of the small hit start demonstration effect and execution of the small hit end demonstration effect. Generates an effect control command ("small hit end demo command") to be instructed.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 81 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms the first special symbol after the variation display Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 82 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 81 and the second special symbol display device 82 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol at the time of stopping the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol gaming timer becomes "0"). To generate an effect control command (referred to as a "variable stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol to be variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 85 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and causes the normal symbol to be determined after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operation state of the normal symbol display device 85 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180.

  If the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role solenoid 78 as a special game processing after the final display of the special symbol, and the special electric role The object 77 is released in accordance with a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric character 77 is regarded as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for the prescribed number of rounds (in this example, 2R, 12R, 16R) . Here, when the big hit type is a so-called 12R big hit (symbol group A, C) or 16R big hit (symbol group D), the big winning opening is opened for about 30 seconds at maximum in one round game. On the other hand, when the big hit type is a so-called 2R big hit (design group B, E, F), the big winning opening is opened for about 0.05 seconds at maximum in one round game.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery of special symbol turns into a small hit, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric position solenoid 78 as a small hitting game processing after the final display of the special symbol. , The special motorized character 77 is opened for a short period of time. A small hit game is distinguished from a special game consisting of a plurality of round games in that it is comprised of a single round game. Here, when comparing the 2R special game and the small hit game described above, although they are different internally, the same point in one open / close time (0.05 second) and the same open / close times are the same (the former Since one opening and closing is common to two rounds of two rounds and the latter is two rounds per opening and round two rounds), the game of an open time and opening pattern similar in appearance is unfolded.

  In addition, when the winning combination lottery of the normal symbol is won, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric role solenoid 68 to open the ordinary electric role 67 only for a predetermined opening time. Here, the motorized part control means 160 opens the ordinary motorized part 67 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas in the easy entering state (the electric chow support state) the ordinary electric motor 67 The accessory 67 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) as compared to the normal state.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to indicate an error state effect on the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is requested. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is a means for detecting whether the front frame 2 is open. The back set open switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back mechanism board 30 is open. The magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are so-called detection means for detecting so-called goto action.

  The main information storage unit 180 acquires the random number value information, information on the gaming state (certain change state, time reduction state, easy entering state) regarding the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, information on the variation pattern selection state, result information of the winning lottery (Hit, small hit, lose), information of stop symbol and fluctuation pattern pertaining to special symbol and ordinary symbol, information about special game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of opening per round game), etc., special It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of the symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric symbol 77, information of effect control command data, etc., and stores each information. Provided with a predetermined storage area.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by parallel transmission when there is a command transmission request. It is done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MOD data is “1”, Bit7 of EVENT data is "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of MODE and EVENT. The effect control command generated in each process is, in principle, transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle in the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

<< Effect control board >>
The effect control board 200 is, as shown in FIG. 71, an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect integration means 220, a lamp control means 230, a character control means 240, an error effect control means 250, a sub main information storage means 260, a command. Transmission / reception means 270. The above-described means in the effect control board 200 are constituted by the sub main CPU 201, the ROM 202, the RAM 203, the hardware such as the electronic circuit disposed on the effect control board 200, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional expression of

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, pre-reading notice lottery random number for use in drawing of pre-reading notice effect, pre-reading notice pattern random number used for selecting pre-reading notice pattern, decorative pattern random number used for selecting stop pattern of decorative pattern, decorative pattern A variation effect pattern random number used to select the variation effect pattern of, a notice effect pattern random number used to select the advance effect pattern, and the like are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control side main processing described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes the effect mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the advance notice control means 223, the decoration symbol determining means 224, the variation effect determining means 225, the notice effect determining means 226, and the big hit effect determining means 227. Including.

  Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in the form of consistency with the gaming state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Run. In the present embodiment, the three types of effect modes include a normal effect mode, a probability change effect mode, and a time-saving effect mode. In the effect display device 95, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image to be displayed on the back of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode currently in stay is displayed, and the background images are different for each effect mode Since the setting is made, the player can recognize which one of the effect modes currently in stay is from the type of the background image.

  The suspension information display control means 222 is a first suspension ball number counter for counting the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol, a second suspension ball number counter for counting the number of operation suspension balls of the second special symbol, have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding sphere number counter and the second holding sphere number counter are based on the information of the operation holding sphere number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. In addition, the holding information display control means 222 is based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter, in the holding display portion 701, 702 of the effect display device 95, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, while the white-displayed reserve image is displayed when the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is generated, it becomes the target of the advance notice when the reserve change look-ahead notice effect described next is executed. The reserved image is changed from a normal display mode (white) to a special display mode (blue → green → purple → red, etc. according to the degree of expectation of big hit).

  Pre-reading advance notice control means 223 determines the possibility of execution of pre-reading advance notice effect by lottery at the time of receiving the prior determination command from main control board 100 as a trigger. Preread notice control means 223 temporarily stores information (preread information) of the predetermination result included in the predetermination command in the preread information storage area of sub main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entering order of the operation holding ball. . The previewed advance notice effect is generated as one mode of so-called continuous notice effect which gives notice of the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit or reach effect over a plurality of continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) is executable, the information of the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 (result of the pre-judgment) and the information of the symbol memory number command (the number of existing operation pending balls) After analysis, an advance notice effect pattern for a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation holding ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) serving as a trigger for generating the advance notice effect of this time. Note that there are various types of preview advance notice effects such as a pending change advance notice effect, a chance look ahead notice effect, and a background change advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 is a combination of the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol (left symbol, middle symbol,...) Based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Determine the left symbol) by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed of, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers or letters. In this example, all twelve types of characters such as the numbers “1” to “9” and the characters “A”, “B”, and “C” are set as identification elements. Each decorative symbol is displayed in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “9” → “A” → “B” → “C” according to the arrangement of the symbol rows. Display cyclically on Z3. In this example, as a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), even-numbered decorative symbols are usually treated as non-probable occurrences of big hit occurrences, while odd-numbered and letter decorative symbols are subject to positive variation occurrence Treat as a definite variation design.

  In addition, the decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables to be referred to when the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plurality of types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for small hit, a stop symbol pattern table for reach loose, a stop symbol pattern table for non reach loose, and the like. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a specific combination, for example, “7 · 7 · 7” or “1 · 1 · 1” As such, a combination of three patterns is selected. Also in the case where the lottery result is 2R big hit or small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as “3 · 5 · 7” is selected. That is, the specific combination of the 2R big hit and the small hit may not necessarily be a combination of three patterns. If the lottery result is out of reach, for example, only the middle symbol is the number before and after the left symbol and the right symbol are in agreement, such as “3 · 4 · 3” or “7 · 5 · 7”. A combination out of frame is selected. In the case of a small hit or a 2R big hit, the above-described reach may be a mode of deviation. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery result is a non-reach out, a combination (so-called loose eye) in which three symbols are not aligned, such as "3.1.2" or "9.4.6." Is selected. Also, when the lottery result is a non-reach out, a specific outcome called so-called "chance" may be selected. Furthermore, when an effect is given to temporarily stop before final display of the final stop symbol as described above, the temporary stop symbol is selected.

  The fluctuation effect determining means 225 specifies the fluctuation process (rendering process) from the fluctuation start to the stop in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol based on the information (fluctuation pattern information) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100 Determine the presentation pattern. The fluctuation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of fluctuation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a fluctuation effect pattern, and a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (a fluctuation time is selected from among the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern tables. Is selected to correspond to the variation production pattern table corresponding to. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random number and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, while the basic pattern of symbol variation (for example, "N reach A", "SP reach A", etc.) is determined as the variation pattern on the main control substrate 100 side, the variation control pattern is on the presentation control substrate 200 side. Based on the basic pattern, detailed patterns of symbol variation (for example, “N reach A1, A2, A3”, “SP reach A1, A2, A3, A4”, etc.) are defined in which the scenario of the effect display process is defined in detail. As described above, the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation. The timing etc. which generate a preliminary announcement production in a stage are also prescribed as a time schedule. In addition, the stop order for stopping a decorative symbol is previously determined for every fluctuation production pattern, and it is made to stop in order of a left symbol-> a right symbol-> a middle symbol in this embodiment in principle. However, in the case of a fluctuation effect pattern with a short fluctuation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a specific fluctuation effect pattern, the order of left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stop order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect determining means 226 determines a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each step of the process of changing the decorative symbol along the above-described scenario of the change effect pattern. The preview effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character or motif, an animation, etc., an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating the effect device, etc. . The advance presentation effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and it is indicated in advance that it is highly probable that the symbol variation stops in the big hit mode and the big hit reliability is high. The notice effects include a notice effect performed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect performed after the reach state occurs. The preview effects are different from each other in the big hit reliability, and basically, the big hit reliability is relatively higher in the advance effects displayed after the reach occurrence than in the advance effect displayed before the reach occurrence It has become. The notice effect determining means 226 holds the notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern by type of notice effect according to the type of notice effect occurring along the scenario of the change effect pattern. It is designed to select the notice effect pattern table. Based on the notice effect pattern random number value acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and selects from among a plurality of notice effect patterns by lottery. Choose one. Specific types of preview effect patterns include comment preview effect pattern, background preview effect pattern, SU (step-up) preview effect pattern, group preview effect pattern, cut-in preview effect pattern, feature movable preview effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This advance notice effect is basically performed by combining the display of one or more advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 95. Therefore, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol by the same variation representation pattern, it becomes possible to generate a variety of representation modes by the combination with one or a plurality of advance presentation.

  The jackpot effect determining means 227 is a special game effect including a jackpot start demonstration and a jackpot end demonstration to be displayed during the special game prior to the execution of the special game based on the demonstration time information of the jackpot effect from the main control board 100 Determine the contents of the jackpot game effect). Also, when the jackpot effect determination means 227 receives a hit start demonstration effect command or a hit end demonstration effect command from the main control board 100, according to the contents of the determined special game effect, the hit start demonstration effect in the effect display device 95 and Control the production process of the hit end demonstration effect.

  As described above, the effect supervising means 220 generates an image control command relating to an image and sound based on the determined effect contents (variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, etc.), and this is used as the sub main information storage means 260. Store in the command storage area of

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls lighting of the effect lamp, light emission color and the like in accordance with the contents of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25), and a lamp corresponding to the determined effect pattern Data is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 291.

  The feature effect control means 240 controls the drive of each effect device in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect supervising means 220. The feature effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the effect device, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 292.

  The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when an error presentation designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify an occurrence of an error condition in the gaming machine according to the error presentation pattern There is.

  The sub main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information of a decorative symbol, information of a variation effect pattern, information of a notice effect pattern, information of a control command, and the like, and is a predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, an image control board 300. And an ACK command buffer for storing an ACK command from Each command buffer is formed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, an image control command, and an ACK command.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store this effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute reception interrupt processing (described in detail later) of the rendering control command, and various rendering control commands are executed in this interrupt processing. It is supposed to get. When the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives a strobe signal, it performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing below priority level 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (the change effect pattern information, the notice effect pattern information, the decoration symbol information, etc.) set by the effect generalization means 220. The image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in the order set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 95 to variably display the effect image including the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change at each stage of the change display process. Furthermore, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in an ACK command buffer.

[Process on main control board side]
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the main control board 100 side is configured to include a main control side main process and a main control side timer interrupt process.

Main control side main process
75 to 76 are flowcharts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. In the main control side main processing, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by the reset at the time of power on, the program is started and the processing after S1 is started.

  First, as the initial setting necessary at the time of power on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and the access of the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is judged whether the information of the power-off normal is stored (S6).

  Here, when the information on power-off normal is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether the checksum is 0, that is, whether the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated at power off processing described later, so if it is backed up normally, the check at power on is checked. Sam is "0". As described above, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is properly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 described later in order to return to the state before the power failure. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 95, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

  Next, in the power failure / return setting process, setting of power on normal information, initialization of various errors, and communication initialization with the payout control board 400 in the RAM 103 are sequentially performed (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to store that the power-on was correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data for the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of the power-off is read, and the power-off recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request of the effect control command ("power-off recovery command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power failure recovery command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entering states, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. The command request for the unsent part before power-off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, read the information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off, and request the effect control command including the information of the number of operation pending balls ( S16).

  Subsequently, return setting is performed to return the normal motor-operated part 67 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 65 is in the open state) (S17). Further, return setting is performed to return the special electric combination product 77 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 64 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power-off is set (S19). In addition, a special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt prohibition is set (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set as preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (S23). When the power is not shut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number updating process, in this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the processing for prohibiting the above-described interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the generation of the next interrupt process is utilized in S21 to S25. Repeat the above process. When there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is activated when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described next.

  Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not the power-on normal information (S27: No), the power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse every fixed time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process. In addition, as a term used below, the terms "condition device" and "character continuous actuation device" mean conceptual control equipment, and "condition device" means a big hit in the special symbol game The "character continuous operating device" is capable of operating the special motorized product 77 a plurality of times in succession.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, in order to restart the watchdog timer, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 executes the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the big winning port switch 76, the door open switch, the frame open switch, the back set open switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. , And after performing their state determination, store these detection information.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value “0”. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number updating process, the random number per symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0". In addition, when the value of the counter makes one turn, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, initial value random number update processing is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per symbol, the software initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like.

  Next, a second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning ineffective period of the second starting opening 65 are determined, and the effective period data or the invalid period data of the second starting opening 65 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this prize monitoring process, based on the detection information of the first starting opening switch 61, the second starting opening switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, and the special winning opening switch 76 in the input processing (S53), the switch passage inspection of the gaming ball As a result, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed each switch, the number of winning balls is stored, and a request for sending out a payout control command is made.

  Next, a winning ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored and the payout control board 400 is executed. Perform communication inspection with

  Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 70 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation gate 70 is passed, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation holding ball information As well as updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of four, storing the random numbers pertaining to the normal symbol lottery.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control processing, in order to perform a series of processing according to the normal symbol display device 85 or the normal electric character 67, according to the value of the normal symbol gaming status, processing during normal symbol fluctuation, processing during normal symbol stop symbol display Execute processing during normal electric part operation, processing during demonstration of normal electric part operation end, and the like. In the normal symbol change processing, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to change or display the normal symbol.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol operation retention ball number is digested by one and the normal symbol The determination of success or failure, the determination of symbols, the determination of fluctuation patterns, the setting of fluctuation time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, the starting opening monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, when the winning of the first starting opening 60 and the second starting opening 65 of the gaming ball is monitored, and there is a winning of the gaming ball, the number of holding balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. The random number storage, the pre-reading advance notice effect judgment, the command request of the number of the figure memory and the like it does in order.

  Next, special symbol control processing is executed (S65). In this special symbol control processing, as a series of processing concerning the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol gaming status, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) described later in detail, the special symbol variation processing (S430) ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), etc. are executed.

  Next, a special motorized product control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and the operation end of the special electric symbol 77 are set as the operation processing concerning the special electric symbol 77, large The opening time and opening number of the winning opening 64, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, the command request of the demonstration effect and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, the special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In the special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the special winning opening 64 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, special symbol variation start monitoring control processing is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of holding balls is digested by one, and the command request of the symbol memory number, the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol , Special symbol pattern determination, probability variation function determination, time reduction function determination, setting of operation pattern of special electric combination product, setting of demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the open circuit short circuit power source abnormal signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request an error display from the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and the effect control command (“error While performing the request of the effect designation command “), the output request of the security signal for outputting to the external terminal is performed.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric character 77 operates continuously (prescribed number of rounds), the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. In addition, display data for causing the status indicator of the main control board 100 to display information on the error status detected in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing is created.

  Next, a handle state signal inspection process is executed (S72). In this steering wheel state signal inspection processing, the touch state of the launching handle 12 is monitored based on the detection information from the touch sensor of the launching handle 12, and based on the result of this monitoring, a rendering control command (command of steering wheel state rendering) Generate

  Next, LED output processing is performed (S73). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65) is performed to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of holding balls, the number of times the special motorized symbol is operated continuously, and the error. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), gaming state display processing (S71), etc., each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 85, each special view reserve lamp 73, 74, general drawing reserve As well as outputting to the lamp 86 and the status indication lamp of the main control board 100, the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, emission control signal output processing is executed (S74). In this emission control signal output process, when communication abnormality with the payout control substrate 400 or disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is not detected, a signal of release permission is output to the payout control substrate 400, and release of the gaming ball is permitted. Do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting the firing is outputted to the payout control board 400 to forbid the firing of the gaming ball.

  Next, test signal output processing is executed (S75). In this test signal output process, in the performance confirmation test for determining whether or not the game machine is appropriate, various test signals indicating the operating state of the game machine are created and output to an external test apparatus.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S76). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special motorized item control process (S66) are performed in order to operate the respective motorized items 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the motorized combination solenoids 623, 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S77). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S78). In this external information output process, operation state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S79). As a result, the main control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the main control main process, and the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the main control board 100 detects a power cut (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated to turn on the power cut confirmation flag. Do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off time processing (S26 to S32) is executed.

«Special symbol game processing»
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start opening monitoring control processing (S64), the special symbol control processing (S65), the special electric character control processing (S66), the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is the case.

(Starting opening monitoring control processing)
First, the starting opening monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting opening monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether a game winning on the first starting opening 60 has been detected (S201). If a prize winning on the first starting opening 60 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S202).

  When the operation reserve ball number of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number according to the first special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S203). Then, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by 1 as the update of the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol (S 204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 60 is ended.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game winning on the second starting opening 65 has been detected (S205). If a winning on the second starting opening 65 has been detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S206). When the operation reserve ball number of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number value per special symbol, a symbol random number value per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number value according to the second special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S207). Then, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by one (S208) as the update of the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol (S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 65 is ended.

  Subsequently, whether or not there is an update of the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, ie, whether or not the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208. It is determined (S209). If there is an update of the number of operation pending balls (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means It is stored in the 180 command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a predetermination timing of the advance notice effect (S211). As described above, the predetermination timing is (1) waiting for each ball, and (2) waiting for the ball for holding the first special symbol while the electric support function is not in operation. , If you acquired the operation holding ball of the second special symbol while the electric chew support function is in operation, (3) If you acquired the operation holding ball of the second special symbol during the big hit medium or small hit, any of When it is When it is the prior determination timing (S211: YES), the random value per special symbol is read out from the hit random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the prior judgment is made (S212). Then, a success / failure predetermination command including information of the determination result (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Also, the symbol random number per special symbol is read out from the hit symbol random number buffer of the storage n storage area, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol prior determination command including information of the determination result (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read out from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the fluctuation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern prior determination command including information of the determination result (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring process described later for the special symbol side satisfying the variation start condition Execute (S310). When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, as described above, the process of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is medium or small (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in change standby, that is, whether both the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are "00H (during change)" It is determined whether or not it is (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special is selected. It is considered that the variation start condition of the symbol is established, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304) The second special symbol side of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol has priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305) . Here, when the number of holding balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the variation start condition of the first special symbol is established, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (following After setting the addresses of various tables and addresses of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process shifts to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  In addition, when the change start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310), with reference to the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above, with the target of the current variation start The special symbol side process will be executed, but since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, in the first special symbol side process It will be described together without distinction as to whether it is the processing of the second special symbol side.

  First, the number of operation reserved balls on the side of the special symbol to be subjected to the start of fluctuation this time is decremented by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side targeted for the variation start this time is accessed, and a random number per special symbol stored in the first hold storage area (hold 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out in order, and these random number values are used in the special symbol qualifying process (S320), the symbol determining process (S330) and the variation pattern selecting process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol conformity determination area, the special symbol pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S313). Further, as updating of the pending storage area, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to the lower pending storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, special symbol propriety judgment processing is executed (S320). In the special symbol compliance determination process (S320), first, a special symbol compliance lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the gaming state is a special symbol probability variation state, a high probability success or failure lottery table is acquired, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a low probability success or failure lottery table is acquired. Next, a random value per special symbol is read out from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol odds lottery table, based on the random number value per special symbol, to determine whether the special symbol success or failure. In addition, the value (the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, the outlying data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, symbol determination processing is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number (variation added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the pass / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the character effect number is determined type of symbol group (eight patterns of symbol groups A to L) and operation state of probability variation function of special symbol and normal symbol (probability variation of special symbol / probability variation of special symbol off) / A total of 32 patterns are determined on the basis of the combination of 4 patterns of probability variation on / normal symbol / normal variation of pattern). When the result of the pass / fail determination is an out-of-order, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a small hit (S341), and it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the pass / fail determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the pass / fail determination is a removal (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S333, the special symbol It is determined whether to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, if the type of symbol group (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to give the probability variation function, and if the type of symbol group is that usually indicates a symbol, probability variation Decide not to give features. The determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  In addition, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S333, as the gaming state after the special game, while determining the number of activations of the fluctuation time shortening function (S344), the number of activations of the electric cho support function is determined. To do (S345). The determination result (operation count information of the fluctuation time shortening function, operation count information of the electronic chow support function) is stored in the time saving storage area of the main information storage unit 180 and the number of easy-to-enter-ball storage area.

  Subsequently, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S333, the operation pattern of the special electric symbol 77 is set (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric character 77, the prescribed number of rounds of the round game (in this example, 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 (in this example, 30) Set the second, 0.05 second etc.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S333 and the current gaming state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S333, the demonstration effect time (the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time) of the special game or the small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol suitability determination area and the special symbol design determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol qualification determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be subject to variation this time is transited from "00H (during standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S350).

(Special symbol control process)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric combination 77 is not operating, that is, whether the special combination game status is "00H (waiting state)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric symbol 77 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the second special symbol. The addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area are set (S403), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage area are set (S404), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S410).

  In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) to be described next, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-described S403 or S404, the special to be the subject of the present variation Although the processing on the symbol side is to be executed, since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in the special case? The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinction.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is performed to shift to processing according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol game status. First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not zero (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). If NO in S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (during variation)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the processing proceeds to special symbol variation processing (S430). If NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

(Special symbol change start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the success or failure lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a fluctuation time corresponding to the currently selected fluctuation pattern is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the start of the change of the special symbol, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S 425), and the change start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S 426). As a change start command, in order to start inspection and effect display of communication lines between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200, a communication check command, a change added pattern information specification command, a change pattern specification command, a character effect number specification command Are sequentially created and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used to determine the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of change)" to "02H (during change)" (S428).

(Process during special symbol change)
Next, special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

  First, in order to perform variable display of a special symbol, display pattern number switching processing of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 in the LED output process (S73) in order to change or display the special symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is finished (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be determined and displayed on the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to display the decorative symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the determined display time (S435). In addition, "determination display time" is time which makes a stop symbol stop display definite at the time of the fluctuation | variation stop of a special symbol. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during variation)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Process during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. 85 to 86 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the finalized display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the finalized display time of the special symbol is finished (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transited from "03H (during stop symbol display)" to "00H (during standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the success or failure determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the hit or not judgment data is a big hit data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability fluctuation function operation stop (S444), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operation stop (S445), the power chew support function operation Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the special symbol mode flag is set to "00H (not operated)", and the hour reduction number counter and the ball entry number state number counter are set to "00H" to clear them to zero.

  Next, as a hit start demonstration setting process of the special game, a hit start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (hit start demonstration command) instructing start of the hit start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of times of execution of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Further, the special electric role thing game status is transited from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success or failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the success / failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S 451: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S 452) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability variation frequency counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 453: NO), S 454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 455.

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455). When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the time saving number counter is zero (step S457). If the time saving number counter is zero (S 457: YES), it is determined that the number of times of ending the special symbol time shortening state has been reached, and the operation of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is stopped (S 458). If the time reduction number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 457: NO), S 458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 459.

  Next, it is determined whether the electronic chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), the easy entry state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a digesting amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S460) . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the end number of the easy-to-enter state has been reached, and the operation of the electric chow support function is stopped (S462). If the entry easy state number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 461: NO), S 462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 463.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset number of ends. If it has reached, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the end number has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, a presentation control command (gaming state designation command) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When small hit data is stored (S 466: YES), a production control command for setting a hit start demonstration display time as a hit start demonstration setting process for a small hit game and instructing the start of hit start demonstration effect Are generated (S467). Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "00H (waiting state)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S468). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success or failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, when small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the shift data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469 are executed. skip. In addition, when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the reason why the process of clearing the content of the flag is not performed is that “00H” is originally stored as the outlier data.

(Special electric role control process)
Next, the special motorized product control process (S66) will be described. FIGS. 87 to 89 are flowcharts showing the details of the motor-operated role control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric role thing game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). If the special electric role thing game status is "01H" (S501: YES), special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In the special game process, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 77 is in operation (S502). If the special electric symbol 77 is not in operation (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric symbol 77 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric symbol 77 is the timing at which the special electric symbol 77 starts to operate in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric symbol 77 (S503: YES), the special electric symbol 77 starts its actuation (S504), and S505 to S509 are processed as the special electric symbol 77 is in operation. Execute the process of

  As processing during the operation of the special electric role 77, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64 (S505), and the operating time (opening time) of the special electric role 77 is It is determined whether it has elapsed (S506). At this time, when the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64 (S505: YES), or when the operation time of the special electric combination 77 has passed (S506: YES), the special electric combination 77 The operation is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether the number of times of continuous operation of the special motorized product 77 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (S508). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S508: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric symbol 77 is incremented by one (S509).

  On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special motorized character 77 has reached the specified number of rounds (S508: YES), the process proceeds to S510, and the end game display time is set as the end game setting processing Along with setting, an effect control command (hit end demonstration command) instructing the start of the hit end demonstration effect is generated (S510).

  Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S511). Further, the easy-to-enter-state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy-to-enter-state number counter (S512).

  Subsequently, with reference to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in the above S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S513). If it is the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S513: YES), the data at the time of operation "7FH" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol starts To do (S514). On the other hand, when it is not the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S513: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability variation frequency counter, and S514 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction number counter is fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S515). If it is the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S515: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S516). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S515: NO), S516 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state frequency information stored in the ball easy entry state frequency counter is the electric chow support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S517). If it is the electric chow support function operation data (S517: YES), the operation of the electric chow support function is started (S518 to S520). That is, the operation start of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S518), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S519), and the operation start of the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 67 (S520) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chow support function operation data, S518 to S520 are skipped.

  Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S521). Subsequently, an effect control command (playing state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in the above-mentioned S511 to S521 is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It stores in the command storage area (S522). In the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric role thing game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S523).

  On the other hand, when the special electric role thing game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530, and whether the special electric role thing game status is "02H (small hit game)" It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric role thing game status is "02H" (S530: YES), small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game processing, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 77 is in operation (S531). If the special motorized item 77 is not in operation (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric symbol 77 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric symbol 77 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as processing during the operation of the special electric character 77, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the maximum winning number in the large winning opening 64 (S533), the operation time of the special electric character 77 (open It is determined whether time has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64 (S533: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric combination 77 has passed (S534: YES), the special electric combination 77 The operation is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, as a hit ending demonstration setting process of the small hit game, a hit ending demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (a hitting end demonstration command) instructing generation of a hitting end demonstration effect is generated (S536). Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S537). Then, the effect control command (gaming state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S 538). The game state specification command is used on the side of the effect control board 200 to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode, to specify the effect mode to which the transition is made, and the like. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S538).

[Process on production control board side]
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 90 to 98. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 is reset start process (including main process on the effect control side) which is executed when the sub main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and the effect control side timer interrupt activated every predetermined cycle. Processing, reception interruption processing of effect control command activated due to strobe signal from main control board 100, and lamp activated with arrival of predetermined occurrence time specified in time schedule of variation effect pattern It is configured to include a rendering interrupt process, a transmission interrupt process of an image control command activated every predetermined period, and a reception interrupt process of an ACK command activated upon reception of an ACK command. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when multiple interrupt processes occur is set. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram for explaining the priority levels of interrupt processing. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset (Fig. 90): Highest priority", "Reset start processing by various abnormality (Fig. 90): High priority" → "Reception control command reception interrupt processing (Fig. 97): Level 7 → "Reset start processing by WDT (during runaway detection) (Fig. 90): Level 3" → "Interrupt processing for image control command transmission: Level 2", "ACK command reception interrupt processing: level 2" → " The priority levels are prioritized in the order of the effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 98): level 1 and “lamp effect interrupt process (FIG. 95): level 1”. Note that “Reset start processing due to various types of abnormality” is, for example, during the DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer when the CPU 201 attempts to access the illegal area or the illegal method when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction. Start when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main processing, basically, the processing is advanced after being set in any state of all interrupts inhibited or interrupts inhibited other than the effect control command reception interrupt. After that, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during the execution of the interrupt process (a multiple interrupt occurs), it is basically an interrupt process with a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is inhibited if the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level than the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process is performed in a state in which other interrupts with the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interruption process returns to the effect control side main process in a state in which all interruptions are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interruption factor is prescribed by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, or the reset caused by WDT (due to runaway detection) is activated, and the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting necessary at power-on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is inhibited until the various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set to a variable with an initial value, and initialization is performed by clearing 0 to a variable having no initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, processing is performed to set the type of error to be validated for the model among the various errors set in advance for all models (S 606). Further, a turn-off request is made to turn on the effect lamp LP (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S 608).

  Subsequently, a main effect control process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). Details of the effect control side main processing (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that although it is usually impossible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing when shifting to the effect control-side main processing in S609, the processing may return to this processing in the unlikely event that a program bug or the like occurs. Are switched to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced compared to that in the normal operation (S610).

<< main processing of production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing effect control side main processing (S609).

  First, in the effect control side main processing, an address (head address where the program is developed) for acquiring a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once at the time of power on (when reset starts) of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and in order to control the operation of each rendering device by devices such as a motor and a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the necessary position information. At the end of the initialization operation, each rendering device returns to a preset initial position (reference position). In addition to the effect devices (movable objects), the reset signal (electric signal) output or reset command (command information) is sent to the image control means (sub-sub CPU) to reset the display of the image display device etc. Send. In addition, when the power is turned on after the occurrence of the power failure during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, the image control command is output only to fluctuate the decorative symbol after the output of the reset signal (or reset command), The effect performed by adding to the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a time lag or the like of the effect display from occurring due to the time difference until each control board completes the process related to the start-up after the power is turned off.

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is configured to write a predetermined clear word in the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset timeout time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, the off symbol update process is executed (S615). In this removal symbol updating process, the removal symbol counter set in the RAM 203 is updated. The out-of-design symbol counter is a loop counter for determining an out-of-design symbol combination of the decorative symbol, and, for example, cyclically operates by incrementing one by one between “111” and “999”. In addition, in this example, in order to determine combination (A big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, a reach-off symbol, a non-reach-out symbol etc.) of all the decorative symbols by random number lottery, this processing is not actually performed.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S616). In this input port check processing, monitoring of reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in port input / output processing S 712 in timer interrupt processing described later is monitored at each interrupt occurrence, and monitoring is performed several times (for example, four times). The signal level is “1 (H level)” if all the input port states are “1”, “0 (L level)” if all “0”, otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal). The I / O port circuit 204 monitors input information such as a detection signal of a position detection sensor of each rendering device or an abnormality monitoring signal or outputs or operates a driving signal (drive data to be described later) to each rendering device. It has a function of transmitting control commands.

  Subsequently, an error presentation management process is executed (S617). In this error presentation management process, based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S621), error presentation by various devices is started. Here, when the lamp effect number is set in the command analysis process (S621) to perform the error notification lamp effect which is one aspect of the error effect (when there is a lamp request), the lamp corresponding to this lamp effect number The pattern data is specified, and the error notification lamp effect is started. In the ramp pattern data, ramp data associated with one frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. Further, in the lamp pattern data, a layer (details will be described later) is set according to the type of lamp effect. Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, the error management timer is set to an initial value (error presentation time) to manage the progression of the error presentation. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S720) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer has timed out, the effect lamp LP is turned off to end the error effect.

  Subsequently, an effect button monitor control process is executed (S618). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance effect is incorporated during the symbol change, the input state of the effect button 10 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of buttons are set in advance according to the button advance effect. The content of the effect corresponding to the input state of the effect button 10 is determined from among the effect contents of the species.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S619). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern (noting the contents of notice effect occurring at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol) along the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S621) The advance notice number is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. Also, an image control command is generated to designate the preview effect number on the image control board 300 side. At this time, if a feature preview effect pattern (feature preview effect number) is selected as the preview effect pattern, a feature request is generated, and in the subsequent device management process (S620), driving of the rendering device The pattern is identified. In this example, the main loop processing efficiency is improved instead of drawing all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (notice effect effect patterns) generated within one variation of the decorative symbol in one main loop process. In order to make it perform, it is divided into every occurrence time (for example, fluctuation start stage, reach generation stage, fluctuation stop stage) of advance notice effect, and it is the composition which draws the lottery over plural times main loop processing. At that time, since it is necessary to synchronize with the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (send the image control command immediately) about the notice effect which occurs at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the lottery is made in the main loop processing of the start. It is supposed to be done. Also, when a notice effect pattern is selected in the notice lottery management process, an image control command for instructing the notice effect number is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260. . Specifically, the command set function for external interrupt use "function name: CmdSet" is called, and processing for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer (command set processing) is performed.

  Next, device management processing is executed (S620). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request and feature request) of various devices, an effect number (lamp effect) is selected from plural types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 The pattern data corresponding to the number, feature preview effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the lamp pattern data, a layer (details described later) is set according to the type of lamp effect. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 95. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the rendering device, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at fixed intervals, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the effect device is stopped. End control of the device.

  In this example, normal lamp effects (managed by this process), Premier lamp effects (managed by this process), and error notification lamp effects (managed by the above-mentioned error effect management process) are prepared as lamp effect types. The layer (layer number) is set according to the type of each lamp effect. The layer number indicates the priority according to the type of lamp effect, and the error notification lamp effect (layer number 3)> premium lamp effect (layer number 2)> normal lamp effect (layer number 1) in descending order of priority ). In this device management process, when two or more lamp requests are simultaneously or at different timings, the corresponding lamp pattern is specified regardless of the layer number, and internally based on all lamp patterns. It is supposed to execute control. The normal lamp effect, the premier lamp effect, and the error notification lamp effect are different in the lighting mode of the effect lamp LP. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in this device management processing (S620), also regarding output control of sound data to the speaker 8, similarly to the lamp pattern data, according to the sound pattern data associated with each one frame time, The control of the speaker 8 is started and ended.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S621) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command Execute the effect control process corresponding to the type of. Details of the command analysis process (S621) will be described later with reference to FIG. In this command analysis process (S621), when it is possible to analyze a plurality of effect control commands in one main loop and can be processed within one frame time (16 ms), effect control of the command storage area Analyze commands sequentially. If there is no effect control command in the command storage area, the process waits or the effect lottery random number update process (S623) described later is executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of effect control command) has been executed during the current loop processing (S 622). If the command has just been analyzed (S 622: YES), the process returns to S 614 to shift to the next loop processing. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S 622: NO), the effect lottery random number updating process is executed (S 623). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variation effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S621) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing details of command analysis processing (S621). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of effect control command stored. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the gaming state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process shifts to effect state transition processing (S632). In this effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the hold related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related command includes a symbol storage number command and an advance determination command. If this symbol storage number command is stored (S 633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S 634). In this hold information management process (S 634), the display mode of the hold image displayed on the hold display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 95 by reading the symbol storage number command or the prior determination command from the sub main information storage unit 260 Perform processing to update the displayed number).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. If the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to an effect content determination process (S636). In this effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command In the case, the processing for ending the symbol variation production under execution is executed. The details of the effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hit related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S637). Here, the hit-related command includes a hit start demonstration command and a hit end demonstration command. When the hit rendering related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process shifts to a hit effect display setting process (S638) of the big hit effect and the small hit effect. In the hit effect display setting process (S638), a process for executing a big hit start demonstration effect (small hit start demonstration effect) or a big hit end demonstration effect (small hit end demonstration effect) is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether an error presentation designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S639). If the error presentation designation command is stored (S639: YES), the process goes to error presentation content determination processing (S640). In this error effect content determination process (S640), an error effect specification command is read out from the sub main information storage unit 260, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state by image display of the effect display device 95 is determined. The details of the error presentation content determination process (S640) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO), the command analysis is performed without any action. Even when the processing is ended and the analysis of a certain effect control command is ended, when another effect control command remains in the command storage area, the other process control repetition is repeated until the predetermined processable limit timing is reached. Perform analysis on the remaining presentation control commands of.

(Determination content determination processing)
Next, the effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing details of the effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S641). If a change start command is stored (S641: YES), the content of this change start command (a change pattern specification command, a change additional symbol information specification command, a character effect number specification command) is analyzed, and the contents of this command As a result of the success or failure lottery included in the information, information indicating a symbol group, a fluctuation pattern (variation time), a gaming state, and the like is acquired (S642). The acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. In addition, from the main CPU, a special symbol stop command group designation command including information indicating the result of symbol lottery of special symbol game, and a special symbol pass / fail designation command including information indicating the result of lottery of special symbol game. Information may be received and information included in the content of this command may be acquired.

  Subsequently, the variation presentation pattern selection process is executed (S643). In this variation presentation pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern information acquired in S642 above, a variation presentation pattern table is acquired, and also, variation presentation pattern random number values are acquired from the effect lottery random number generation unit 210, and multiple types of variation presentation Among the patterns, one of the variation presentation patterns is determined by lottery. Fluctuation effect pattern, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, type and time of occurrence of reach effect, type and time of occurrence of advance effect, interrupt timing of lamp effect (start timing of interrupt processing of lamp effect), sound effect (BGM and sound effect) The scenario of the effect display process is defined in which the output timing of the movement timing, the operation timing of the movable effect member, and the like are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260.

  Then, the lamp request function for external interrupt "function name: RampReq" is called to execute lamp request processing (S644). Here, FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing details of the lamp request processing for external interruption (S644). In the present embodiment, the “function” is a modularization of one or more processes, and means a subroutine executed by a calling instruction or the like.

  In the lamp request processing, first, interrupt processing other than the effect control command reception from the main control board 100 is prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the fluctuation effect pattern number is read out from the fluctuation effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the change effect pattern number is requested (S663). The lamp effects selected in this process include a normal lamp effect selected with a normal frequency and a premium lamp effect selected with a relatively low frequency as compared to the normal lamp effect. This premier lamp effect is a special effect that indicates, for example, a big hit winning decision. Next, the lamp effect number requested in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S664). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) of the effect lamp LP, and then the processing proceeds. In this example, a plurality of lamp request storage areas are prepared, and a plurality of lamp effect numbers can be set. When a plurality of lamp effect numbers are set (when there are a plurality of lamp requests), in the layer processing, only lamp effects with high priority are executed in such a manner as to be visible to the player, and lamps with low priority The effects are only internally processed (details will be described later). Then, all the interrupts are permitted (S665), the lamp request process is ended, and the process returns to the original process in the main process.

  Next, returning to FIG. 93, the decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S645). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, the combination (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped is drawn by lottery based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in the above S642. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  Then, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S646). Specifically, a command set function for external interrupt use "function name: CmdSet" is called, and processing for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260 (command set processing) is performed.

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S641: NO), it is determined whether the change stop command is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 (S647). If the variable stop command is stored (S647: YES), the contents of the variable stop command are analyzed, and symbol stop information included in the contents of the command is acquired (S648). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S649). Specifically, the command set function for external interrupt use "function name: CmdSet" is called, and processing for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer (command set processing) is performed.

(Error production contents determination process)
Next, the error presentation content determination process (S640) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing details of the error effect content determination process (S640).

  First, it is determined whether an error presentation designation command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S651). If an error presentation designation command is stored (S651: YES), the contents of this error presentation designation command are analyzed, and information indicating an error state included in the contents of the command is acquired (S652). The acquired information is stored in the error condition determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260.

  Subsequently, an error effect pattern selection process is executed (S653). In this error presentation pattern selection process, an error presentation pattern is determined based on the error state information acquired in S <b> 652. The error presentation pattern defines information such as an error notification image (for example, a message indicating that an error has occurred), a warning sound from a speaker, and a lighting pattern for error notification by a presentation lamp. The error effect pattern data determined here is temporarily stored in the error effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. When the error presentation pattern is set, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer in the above-mentioned error presentation management process (S617), and management of the error presentation is started. The error management timer is updated in an error management timer update process (S720) described later.

  Next, the lamp request function for external interrupt use "function name: RampReq" is called to execute lamp request processing (S654). FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing the details of the lamp request process (S654) for external interruption. The lamp request function "RampReq" called in this process is common to the lamp request function "RampReq" called in the lamp request process (S644) in the above-mentioned effect content determination process (S636). That is, the lamp request process shown in FIG. 96 (A) is a subroutine common to the effect content determination process (S636) and the error effect content determination process (S640). Therefore, in the main processing, the lamp request processing (S644, S654) is performed in one common module. In this lamp request function “RampReq”, all interrupts (other than effect control command reception interrupt processing) are prohibited at the start of processing, and all interrupts are permitted at the end of processing. This is to prevent a failure (for example, a failure that complicates status management) due to the generation of a plurality of lamp requests at the same time when the interrupt processing (a lamp effect interrupt processing described later) is started.

  In the lamp request processing, first, interrupt processing other than the effect control command reception from the main control board 100 is prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the error effect pattern number is read out from the error effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the error effect pattern number is requested (S663). In this process, only the error notification lamp effect for notifying an error state of the gaming machine is requested. Next, the lamp effect number selected in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S664). Then, all the interrupts are permitted (S665), the lamp request process is ended, and the process returns to the original process in the main process.

  Subsequently, returning to FIG. 94, an image control command (error effect start command) required for the error effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S655). Specifically, the command set function for external interrupt use "function name: CmdSet" is called, and processing for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer (command set processing) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, not all lamp requests are performed in the above-described main processing (in command analysis processing), but there may be cases where lamp request interruption processing is activated to perform lamp requests at a predetermined timing. That is, in the time schedule of the variation rendering pattern selected in S643, the occurrence trigger (interruption timing) of the lamp rendering interrupt process is defined in relation to the notice rendering that occurs at each stage of the variation rendering process of the decorative symbol. ing. When the interrupt timing arrives, the lamp effect interrupt process is activated to execute a process of requesting a lamp effect number. The occurrence time of the lamp effect interrupt process is synchronized with the occurrence time of a specific advance notice effect (for example, when the lamp of a color associated with the advance effect contents is lit).

<< Lamp production interrupt process >>
Next, lamp effect interruption processing will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing lamp effect interrupt processing. The lamp effect interrupt process is generated by a software interrupt when the interrupt timing defined in the fluctuation effect pattern comes.

  First, in the lamp effect interrupt process, an interrupt with priority level 2 or higher such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100, a watchdog timer interrupt, etc. is permitted (S671). Subsequently, the lamp request function "function name: RampReq_InINT" for the inside of the interrupt is called to execute the lamp request processing (S672). FIG. 96 (B) is a flow chart showing a lamp request process (S672) for use inside the interrupt. The lamp request function (RampReq_InINT) is different from the lamp request function “RampReq” called in the main processing described above in that the interrupt disable / enable instruction is not set at the beginning and end of the processing. This is because, as described above, the occurrence of other interrupts with the same priority level or lower priority levels is prohibited in each interrupt processing, so that another lamp request is generated during this lamp request processing. Because there is no

  In this lamp request process, the notice effect pattern is read out with reference to the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S681). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the advance effect pattern is requested (S682). For example, when the notice effect is a background notice, if a notice effect pattern for displaying a blue background is selected in the notice lottery management process, a lamp effect (lamp effect number for turning on the effect lamp LP in blue) ) Is requested. Subsequently, the lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S683). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) of the effect lamp LP, and then the processing proceeds. Then, the lamp effect interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

<< Reception interrupt processing of production control command >>
Next, a reception interrupt process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process of effect control command. In the reception interrupt process of this effect control command, as described above, it is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is supposed to be. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not an input value of a rendering control command has been determined (S701). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in a row.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S702). If the command received this time is the first command (S702: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S703). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S704). In addition, as for the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number, it is assumed that the effect control command is received when the effect control command is received, and the effect control command is transmitted at irregular timing such as the start winning of the game ball or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity at the acquisition time by using it as a trigger. As described above, by making the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number irregular, it becomes difficult to generate inconveniences such as the same effect being repeated unnaturally and repeatedly even in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S702: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is any contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S 705: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S 706). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S707). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis process (S621) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S 708). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S708 is cleared (S709).

<< Production control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the effect control timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing effect control timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated by clock pulses at regular time intervals, and is executed in a form of interrupting the effect control side main process described above.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processing after S711 is sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, an interrupt with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 or a watchdog timer interrupt, is permitted (S711).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S712). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port). Note that, in the I / O port circuit 204, an input port is provided in which a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 450 has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. When the power-off signal is input, processing for saving various data at the time of power-off occurrence in the backup area of the RAM 203 is performed as the power-off process. After that, since backup power is supplied from the backup power circuit of the power supply substrate 450, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are maintained without being lost even after the power is turned off. In addition, as other power-off processing, a motor M is a drive source of each of the rendering devices (upper rendering device 500, lower left rendering device 600, upper left rendering device 700, right rendering device 800, and lower rendering device 900). Is turned off (non-energized state), and the operation of each rendering device in the unstable state such as the occurrence of the power supply interruption is interrupted early, so that the initial operation can be performed without any abnormality after the power supply restoration. In addition, the stop position of each rendering device is hold | maintained by the detent torque at the time of non-energization.

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S713). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read out from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in the device control data output process, it is possible to switch the drive data every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data. The details of the device control data output process (S713) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S714). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in the present embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, and a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance effect. By this effect timer, the time schedule in the fluctuation effect pattern is managed, and time management such as the drive timing of the motor M of each effect device and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S713) and the lamp data update process (S717) in this effect timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S715). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 10 is subtracted and updated from the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). In addition, operation effective time is time when operation input of the production button 10 becomes effective.

  Next, an image control command setting process is executed (S716). In this image control command setting process, one or more selected in the notice lottery management process (S619) when the generation timing of the notice effect arrives in the effect timer of the effect timer update process (S714). When a specific preview presentation pattern is included in the preview presentation pattern of the image, an image control command for instructing the specific preview presentation number is generated, and the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260 is generated. Set to Specifically, a process for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer (command set process) is performed by calling a command set function “function name: CmdSet_InINT” for use in an interrupt. Here, for a specific preview effect pattern, for example, an effect pattern for displaying an effect image on the effect display device 95 at the timing when the production button 10 is pressed and operated, or an effect image for displaying the effect image according to the operation of each effect device Pattern etc. are included.

  Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter updating process, the value ("0" to "15") of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter is “15”, the value is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are allocated corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (the lamp data update process in S718) and the runaway monitoring according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task, and one other value is assigned to an error management task (an explanation of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S718). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) or the error effect management process (S617). The lamp data set in this process is data representing lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 291 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit 205. The serial communication circuit 205 performs serial conversion of lamp data of the transmission buffer in units of one byte, and outputs the lamp data to the lamp connection substrate 291 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection substrate 291 by serial transfer. The lamp data update process is a process that is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating a lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (S717) (that is, executed in a cycle of 16 ms) Processing).

  Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, a layer corresponding to the type of each lamp effect (normal lamp effect, premier lamp effect, error notification lamp effect) is set, and a plurality of lamp requests of different types are mutually different. If there is, only the ramp data set in the upper layer (layer with high priority) is output, while the output of the ramp data set in the lower layer (layer with low priority) is prohibited. However, since the lamp data switching process (switching process every 16 ms) itself is not stopped, when the process of the upper layer is finished, the process and continuity in the layer concerned are maintained, The lamp data set in the layer of (1) is output (a lamp effect relating to the lower layer is generated). In addition, in the lamp data update process (S 718), when lamp data relating to a plurality of layers is superimposed to output only lamp data relating to the upper (highest priority) layer, lighting generally has a sense of discomfort without regularity. It is because there is a possibility of becoming a pattern. In addition, although the primary lamp production is distinguished from the normal lamp production and the layer structure and the priority is different, the appearance rate is generally lower in the premier lamp production than in the normal lamp production, but the appearance timing is regularity If the appearance of the premier lamp effect selected as a second choice is reserved due to the presence of the normal lamp effect selected as a first choice, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the premier lamp effect is expected to occur at random timing. It is because the feeling is diminished.

  Subsequently, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S719). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and the image control board 300 is not continuously changed for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames). It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running away, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process in response to the occurrence of the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301. The toggle signal is a signal of a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time.

  Next, an error management timer update process is executed (S720). In this error management timer updating process, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the above-mentioned error presentation management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. The error management timer updating process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter updating process (S717). Therefore, even when the error presentation time becomes long, the time is counted by the timer of 16 ms cycle, so compared with the case where the time is counted every timer interrupt cycle (1 ms), the data amount is It can be reduced. Then, after making all the interrupts permitted, and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control timer interrupt processing is ended, and the processing returns to the original processing before the occurrence of the interruption.

(Device control data output process)
Next, device control data output processing (S713) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing details of the device control data output process (S713).

  First, sensor input check processing is executed (S731). In this sensor input check process, each of the rendering devices (upper rendering device 500, lower left side based on the input information of the position detection sensor stored in the port input / output processing (S712) for each timer interrupt cycle (1 ms) The state of all position detection sensors (initial position sensor, middle position sensor, and movable position sensor) in the rendering device 600, the upper left rendering device 700, the right rendering device 800, and the lower rendering device 900) is confirmed. At this time, the detection state of each position detection sensor is held by a number for each movable effect member (drive motor) provided in each effect device.

  For example, “0” is set as a number corresponding to a state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 (first upper effect member 571) of the upper effect device 500 are detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a. "1" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b. "2" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c. That is, "0" is set as a number corresponding to the state where the effect member is detected by the initial position sensor. “1” is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the intermediate position sensor. "2" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the movable position sensor. In addition, "0" is set as a number when the position detection sensor is in a non-detection state, and "1" is set as a number when the position detection sensor is in a detection state for all position detection sensors in each rendering device. The operation control of the movable effect member may be performed based on the data.

  In this sensor input check process (S731), when it is confirmed that the position detection sensor is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the effect member corresponding to the effect member corresponding to the position detection sensor switched from the non-detection state to the detection state The counter value (the number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor for moving is reset. Specifically, when the sensor detection unit provided in the rendering device blocks the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor, the operation pattern (drive pattern data of the drive motor) being executed detects the position of the counter value of the operation pulse. When it corresponds to the monitoring target pattern data for performing the correction based on the sensor, the counter value of the operation pulse is reset. The reason for separating the monitoring target pattern data from the other data is to prevent the setting of the operation pulse counter value from being changed unnecessarily. As an example of the monitoring target pattern data, drive pattern data in the case of reciprocating the effect member repeatedly can be mentioned. The operation of the rendering device can be stabilized by adopting control that prevents the counter value of the operation pulse from being reset by the detection of the position detection sensor although it is not the monitoring target pattern data by the position detection sensor. become.

  In addition, although each position detection sensor of this embodiment abbreviate | omits detailed illustration, it is an optical sensor which has a light emission part and a light reception part, and the sensor detection part provided in each presentation apparatus starts light shielding of a light reception part When it happens (in the case of so-called rising edge detection), it is determined that the effect member (sensor detection unit) is detected by the position detection sensor. Further, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor indicates the drive amount of the movable effect member whose operation pattern is being executed, and is data for grasping the current position of the effect member in software. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is stored in the position information storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 as position information for grasping the current position of the effect member. In the actual operation of the effect member, a positional deviation may occur with the position information of the effect member software-controlled by the CPU for effect control based on an indefinite element such as a step out of the drive motor. is there. Therefore, the position information of the effect member managed in software is corrected at the timing when the position of the effect member can be physically specified, that is, the timing detected by each position detection sensor. As a result, it becomes possible to execute accurate operation control of the movable type rendering device, and it becomes possible to prevent a failure such as a failure due to contact with another rendering member or the like. Depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor, the counter value of the drive pulse of the drive motor may be added or subtracted in an interrupt process in which the output of the drive pulse is performed. For example, in the forward rotation of the drive motor, "+1" is counted (added), and in the reverse rotation, "-1" is counted (subtracted). For example, depending on the excitation method of the drive motor (1-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation, 2-phase excitation), "+1" (or "-1"), "+2" (or "-2") and the addition amount ( The subtraction amount) may be made different. In this way, drive pattern data of the drive motor includes switching between the step for two-phase excitation and the operation amount for half of the two-phase excitation such as 1-2 phase excitation or 1 phase excitation. With regard to a movable effect apparatus that may operate, it becomes possible to grasp the position information of the effect member by the counter value of the operation pulse.

  Here, a first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 106 schematically shows the relationship between the operation pulse counter values when the initial position sensor, the intermediate position sensor, and the movable position sensor are provided. In the present embodiment, the upper support drive motor 505, the rotation initial position sensor 533a, and the rotation middle position sensor 533b of the upper rendering device 500 provided with the upper initial position sensor 516a, the upper middle position sensor 516b, and the upper movable position sensor 516c. This setting example can be applied to the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect device 500 provided with the movable rotation position sensor 553c. In the following description, the rotation direction of the drive motor for moving the effect member from the initial position toward the movable position is taken as the normal rotation direction.

  In FIG. 106, SP1 is the counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper. In SP2, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor when the drive motor rotates reversely to when the rendering member reaches the initial position number of steps). SP3 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit ends light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor when the drive motor rotates forward to when light shielding of the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor starts. It is a counter value (number of steps). In SP4, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor to when the effect member reaches the intermediate position (Number of steps). In SP5, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor when the drive motor rotates reversely to when the effect member reaches the intermediate position number of steps). SP6 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit completes light shielding of the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor to when light shielding of the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor is started. It is a counter value (number of steps). In SP7, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor to when the effect member reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP8 is a counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction exceeding the movable position) by the mechanical stopper.

  The counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position takes the initial value when the effect member is positioned at the initial position. It is set to a different value. The counter value of the operation pulse in the case of correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of light shielding of the sensor) is also set to different values in forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, a value of zero or dummy data) is set as the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position is set to a counter value which becomes SP2 + SP3. At the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to be SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value that is SP2. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position is set to a counter value that becomes SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data to be SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7) is set as the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position.

  Thus, correction of the position information of the effect member is the reason why different correction values (of the counter value of the operation pulse) are set at the start of detection of the same position detection sensor during forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor. As the timing, it is easy to acquire the timing at which the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state (the timing when the end of the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor) as input information. It is mentioned that it is a member having a physical width. In addition, even if correction of the position information of the effect member is performed at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the detection state to the non-detection state, the processing is equivalent. However, after the effect member reaches the initial position (or the intermediate position, the movable position), the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor moves until it is not shielded from light, so the initial position (or It may be difficult to determine whether or not the intermediate position (movable position) is located. Therefore, it can be said that the present embodiment, which corrects the position information of the effect member at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, is more preferable. Further, in the present embodiment, after the position detection sensor detects that the effect member has moved to the initial position or the movable position, in order to correspond to movement of the effect member to the initial position or the movable position physically, As a counter value of the operation pulse, counter value SP2, SP7 of the operation pulse from when the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor until the effect member reaches the initial position and the movable position. In addition to the above, counter values SP1 and SP8 of operation pulses until the effect member abuts on the mechanical stopper portion are set. As a result, the position control of the effect member can be stabilized, and in the preferred embodiment, it is possible not to set the counter values SP1 and SP8 of the operation pulse until the effect member abuts the mechanical stopper. It is.

  Next, a second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 107 schematically shows the relationship between the operation pulse counter values when the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor are provided. In this embodiment, this setting example can be applied to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 of the upper rendering device 500 provided with the proximity initial position sensor 558a and the separated movable position sensor 558c. Left lower back side drive motor 603 of lower left side rendering device 600 provided with lower left back initial position sensor 605a and lower left back movable position sensor 605c, and lower left side rendering device provided with left standing initial position sensor 636a and left inclined movable position sensor 636c This setting example can be applied to the lower left front side drive motor 637 of 600. Upper left back side drive motor 703 of upper left side rendering device 700 provided with upper left back initial position sensor 705a and upper left back movable position sensor 705c, upper left side rendering provided with upper initial position sensor (not shown) and lower movable position sensor 736c This setting example can be applied to the upper left front side drive motor 737 of the device 700.

  Right lower back side drive motor 803 of the right side effect device 800 provided with the lower right back side initial position sensor 805a and lower right back side movable position sensor 805c, and right side effect device provided with the upper right back initial position sensor 810a and upper right back side movable position sensor 810c This setting example can be applied to the lower right front side drive motor 867 of the right side rendering device 800 provided with the upper right back side drive motor 808 of the 800, the right standing initial position sensor 866a and the right inclined movable position sensor 866c. . Lower supporting position drive motor 904 of lower rendering device 900 provided with lower initial position sensor 908a and lower movable position sensor 908c, and lower side provided with first back initial position sensor 936a and first back movable position sensor 936c This setting example is applied to the front side drive motor 967 of the lower side presentation device 900 provided with the back side rotation drive motor 934 of the presentation device 900 and the first front side initial position sensor 969a and the first front side movable position sensor 969c. Can.

  In FIG. 107, SP11 is the counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction exceeding the initial position) by the mechanical stopper. In SP12, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor at the reverse rotation of the drive motor until the rendering member reaches the initial position number of steps). SP13 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit ends light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor when the drive motor rotates forward to when light shielding of the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor starts. It is a counter value (number of steps). In SP14, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor to when the effect member reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP15 is the counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction exceeding the movable position) by the mechanical stopper.

  The counter value (number of steps) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the initial position and the movable position is set to different values during forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor, with the effect member positioned at the initial position as the initial value. Be done. The counter value of the operation pulse in the case of correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of light shielding of the sensor) is also set to different values in forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, a value of zero or dummy data) is set as the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to be SP12 + SP13. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value that is SP12. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data to be SP12 + SP13 + SP14) is set as the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position.

  Referring back to FIG. 100, after the sensor input check process (S731) is performed, a first role control process is performed (S732). In the first character control process (S 732), the upper support drive motor 505 is requested to request the operation of the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 (first upper effect member 571) of the upper effect device 500. Perform processing to update the drive data of. The drive pattern data of the upper support drive motor 505 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to, for example, four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to (D). The four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110A to 110D are selected according to the content of the operation request for the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. In the operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to (D), (+) of the “operation” item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal direction, and (−) of the “operation” item is The direction of rotation of the drive motor is shown to be in the reverse direction.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110A is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position (hereinafter referred to as the upper movable position aiming operation table). And may be referred to as “1.”, and includes first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8. With the first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position to achieve a constant speed state (Corresponding to the first to third processing tables TA1 to TA3), and when the sensor detection portion 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c, the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 are It is controlled so as to decelerate, hold excitation, and stop at the upper movable position (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TA4 to TA8).

  In the first to second processing tables TA1 to TA2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TA4 to TA6 in the upper movable position-oriented operation table, once for X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated (the operation pulse is output) as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In addition, for example, in the case of the first processing table TA1, “once per X interrupts” means that “frequency” is 250 [pps (pulse per second)] and the interrupt cycle of the effect control timer interrupt process is 1 [Ms] (one thousand interrupts per second), the output of one operation pulse (one step update, one excitation phase update) is obtained in four interrupts. In the third processing table TA3 in the upper movable position-oriented operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is generated once in X times (twice) according to the “frequency (500 [pps)]”. When the upper movable position sensor 516 c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing is shifted to the next processing table. Note that "the number of steps (N)" in the third processing table TA3 indicates that the number is an indefinite number of steps.

  As described above, in the upper movable position-directed operation table, the processing ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. And the processing table which ends the processing when it moves to the detection position of the upper movable position sensor 516c. The number of times of updating the drive data according to the “number of steps” of each table is counted as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the corresponding drive motor (upper support drive motor 505).

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110B is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as the upper intermediate position operation table). And may be referred to as “1.”, and includes first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7. By the first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position to achieve a constant speed state (Corresponding to the first to third processing tables TB1 to TB3), and when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support unit 521 is detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b, the first and second upper support units 521 and 531 are It is controlled so as to decelerate and hold the excitation, and stop at the upper middle position (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TB4 to TB7).

  In the first to second processing tables TB1 to TB2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TB4 to TB5 in the upper intermediate position operation table, once in X times of interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TB3 in the upper middle position operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is generated once in X times (twice) according to the “frequency (500 [pps)]”. When the upper middle position sensor 516b is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing is shifted to the next processing table. As described above, the upper intermediate position operation table is a processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support 521, 531. , And the processing ends when the movement to the detection position of the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is performed.

  In the sixth processing table TB6, as in the other processing tables (for example, the seventh processing table TA7 in the upper movable position-directed operation table), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 due to inertial force. Unlike the drive pattern in which the upper support drive motor 505 performs excitation holding operation for 100 ms in order to completely stop the operation, the upper support drive motor sets the time for maintaining the excitation hold up to 10 [s]. An excitation hold operation 505 is performed. This is because, when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are positioned at the upper intermediate position, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 do not receive the holding force of the mechanical stopper portion or the like. To hold the The reason why the time for maintaining the excitation retention is set to 10 [s] at the maximum is because the time to be maintained differs according to the variation rendering pattern.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110C may be referred to as an operation table for returning the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect producing device 500 to the upper initial position (hereinafter referred to as the upper initial position aiming operation table for convenience) And includes first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8. By the first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper movable position (or upper intermediate position) to the upper initial position. And the first upper support 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and second upper sides are set to the constant speed state (corresponding to the first to third processing tables TC1 to TC3). The support portions 521 and 531 are controlled so as to decelerate and hold the excitation by decelerating the support portions 521 and 531, and to stop them (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TC4 to TC8) at the upper initial position.

  In the first to second processing tables TC1 to TC2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TC4 to TC6 in the upper-initial-position-directed operation table, once for X interrupts corresponding to the "frequency" of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TC3 in the upper-initial-position operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is generated once in X times (four times) according to the "frequency (250 [pps])" When the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing is shifted to the next processing table. As described above, the upper-initial-position operation table is a processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support 521, 531. And a processing table which ends the processing when it moves to the detection position of the upper initial position sensor 516a.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110 (D) is an operation table for reciprocating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 between the upper initial position and the vicinity of the upper intermediate position (hereinafter, for convenience, This table is sometimes referred to as a reciprocating operation table), and includes first to twenty-second processing tables TD1 to TD22. With the first to sixth processing tables TD1 to TD6, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position to achieve a constant speed state (Corresponding to the first to third processing tables TD1 to TD3), and when the sensor detection portion 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a and passes through the upper initial position sensor 516a, The two upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated to be controlled so as to perform an operation of holding excitation (corresponding to the fourth to sixth processing tables TD4 to TD6).

  Subsequently, with the seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD14, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position to bring them into a constant speed state. The first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated to perform excitation holding (corresponding to the seventh to tenth processing tables TD7 to TD10), and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 in the upper movable position The first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated to accelerate and maintain the constant velocity state, and the operation of holding the excitation (corresponding to the eleventh to fourteenth processing tables TD11 to TD14) is set. It is controlled to repeat as many times. The upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position by the fifteenth to twenty-second processing tables TC15 to TC22, and the constant speed state (fifteenth to fifteenth (Corresponding to the seventeenth processing table TD15 to TD17), and when the sensor detection portion 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated It is controlled so as to perform an operation of stopping the excitation at the upper initial position (corresponding to the eighteenth to twenty-second processing tables TD18 to TD22).

  First to second processing tables TD1 to TD2, fourth to fifth processing tables TD4 to TD5, seventh to ninth processing tables TD7 to TD9, and eleventh to thirteenth processes in the reciprocating operation table In the tables TD11 to TD13, the fifteenth to sixteenth processing tables TD15 to TD16, and the eighteenth to twentieth processing tables TD18 to TD20, the upper side support is performed once for X interrupts corresponding to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the partial drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TD3 in the reciprocating operation table, the drive data of the upper support driving motor 505 is updated once in X times (three times) according to the “frequency (333 [pps)]”. When the upper initial position sensor 516a switches from the detection state to the non-detection state, processing to shift to the next processing table is performed. Since the upper initial position sensor 516a is in the detection state at the start of the reciprocation operation, the processing table (TD3) for performing control with an indefinite number of steps is ended at the timing when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches to the non detection state. By shifting to the processing table (TD4) in which control is performed by the number of steps, the operation amount up to the rendering operation position can be stabilized. In the seventeenth processing table TD17 in the reciprocating operation table, the drive data of the upper support driving motor 505 is updated once in X times (four times) according to the “frequency (250 [pps)]”. When the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, processing to shift to the next processing table is performed. As described above, in the reciprocating operation table, the process table is terminated when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by the predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support 521 and 531 are used. And a processing table which ends the process when moved to the detection position (or non-detection position) of the upper initial position sensor 516a.

  In the seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD14 of the reciprocating operation table, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position and fixes them. The first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated to excite and hold the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are accelerated toward the upper movable position to a constant speed state. The operation of decelerating and holding the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 as described below is repeated and the set number of times is repeated (the seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD7). The TD 14 may be controlled to loop a set number of times). Here, the eighth processing table TD8 is a processing table for performing control with an indefinite number of steps, and when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, processing for transitioning to the next processing table (TD9) is performed. Change to do. As a result, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 reliably return to the upper initial position in the reciprocation operation, so that even if the reciprocation operation is repeated, the first and second upper support portions 521, It is possible to prevent the uncomfortable feeling such as the center position of the reciprocation movement of the first and second upper side support portions 521 and 531 being shifted due to the lowering of 531 excessively. In addition, it is not limited to the control to end the reciprocation operation when the reciprocation operation is repeatedly performed a set number of times, and the reciprocation operation is performed by the operation of the production button 10 by turning off the repetition flag of the reciprocation operation. Control may be performed.

  Next, a second role control process is executed (S733). In the second feature control process (S733), when the operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is requested, the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper effect driving motor 538 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to, for example, two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B). The two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B are selected according to the content of the operation request to the second upper effect member 581. In the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B, (+) in the “operation” item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal direction, and (−) in the “operation” item is: The direction of rotation of the drive motor is shown to be in the reverse direction.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 111 (A) is an operation table for moving the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the proximity initial position to the separation movable position (hereinafter, for convenience, may be referred to as an operation table for separation movable position And includes first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7. With the first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper rendering member 581 from the proximity initial position toward the separation movable position to achieve a constant speed state (first to third When the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper effect member 581 is detected by the separation movable position sensor 558c, the second upper effect member 581 is decelerated and excited and held. Are controlled to be stopped (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TE4 to TE7).

  In the first to second processing tables TE1 to TE2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TE4 to TE5 in the separation movable position-directed operation table, once for X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TE3 in the separation movable position-oriented operation table, the drive data of the upper performance drive motor 538 is generated once in X times (twice) according to the “frequency (500 [pps)]”. When the separation movable position sensor 558 c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing to shift to the next processing table is performed. As described above, in the separation movable position-oriented operation table, the processing table ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 by a predetermined number of steps, and the second upper presentation member 581 is the separation movable position sensor And a processing table which ends the processing when moving to the detection position 558c.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 111 (B) is an operation table for returning the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the proximity initial position (hereinafter referred to as an operation table for proximity initial position for convenience). It comprises the first to eighth processing tables TF1 to TF8. By the first to eighth processing tables TF1 to TF8, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper rendering member 581 from the separation movable position toward the proximity initial position, and the constant velocity state (first to third (Corresponding to the processing tables TF1 to TF3), and when the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper effect member 581 is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, the second upper effect member 581 is decelerated and excited and held. Are controlled to be stopped (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TF4 to TF8).

  In the first to second processing tables TF1 to TF2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TF4 to TF6 in the proximity initial position operation table, once for X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” of each table, processing for shifting to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TF3 in the operation table for the proximity initial position, the drive data of the upper performance drive motor 538 is generated once in X times (three times) according to the “frequency (333 [pps)]”. When updating is performed and the proximity initial position sensor 558a switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, processing for transitioning to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the proximity initial position operation table is a processing table in which processing is terminated when an operation pulse is transmitted to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 by a predetermined number of steps, and the second upper presentation member 581 is a proximity initial position sensor And a processing table which ends the processing when moving to the detection position 558a.

  In the second character control process (S733), even when the operation of the second upper effect member 581 is requested, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 move to the upper movable position. If not, skip the process. Then, when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 move to the upper movable position, a process of updating the drive data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is started. For example, in the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), when the upper movable position sensor 516 c switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing of the first processing table TE1 in the separation movable position directed operation table is started. Do.

  As described above, in the upper movable position-directed operation table shown in FIG. 110A, in the upper support portion drive motor 505 of the upper effect device 500, the sensor detection portion 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is the upper movable position sensor 516c. When the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected, they are controlled so as to decelerate and hold the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 and to stop at the upper movable position. As described above, even after the upper movable position sensor 516 c switches from the non-detection state to the detection state and the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 starts operating, the upper support portion drive motor 505 operates for a certain period. In the present embodiment, the “frequency” of the first and second processing tables TE <b> 1 and TE <b> 2 is set to a relatively small value in the operation table for separation movable position shown in FIG. As a result, the rotational speed of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 immediately after the start of the operation is reduced to reduce current consumption. Therefore, in the electrical restriction determination process (S745) described later, the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper rendering unit drive The total value of the current consumption of the drive motor including the motor 538 can reduce the possibility of exceeding the predetermined regulated current value. As described above, even when the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 starts operating in response to the upper movable position sensor 516 c switching from the non-detection state to the detection state, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 operates smoothly. It is possible to

  Next, the third object control process is executed (S734). In the third feature control process (S734), when requesting the operation of the secondary display device 561 of the upper effect device 500, the drive data of the display device drive motor 534 is updated. The drive pattern data of the display device drive motor 534 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to (D), for example, and similar to the case of the first gift control process (S732). Processing can be performed. In the third character control process (S734), even when the operation of the sub display device 561 is requested, the process is skipped if the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is not moved to the separation movable position. Do. Then, when the second upper effect member 581 moves to the separation movable position, a process of updating the drive data of the display device drive motor 534 is started. When the sub display 561 is rotated by the display drive motor 534 in a state where the second upper effect member 581 is not moved to the separation movable position, the second upper side on the rotation locus of the edge of the sub display 561 This is because the effect member 581 is located and interferes. Operation requests for the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531, the second upper effect member 581, and the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect device 500 are collectively transmitted according to the change effect pattern, and the first to third In the feature control process (S732 to S734), the drive of each drive motor based on the detection information and error information of the position detection sensor (of another effect member different from the effect member to be controlled) of the upper effect device 500 Timing is controlled.

  Next, the fourth object control process is executed (S735). In the fourth feature control process (S735), when requesting the operation of the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side rendering device 700, a process of updating the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), for example, and similar to the case of the second role control process (S733) Processing can be performed. In the fourth character control process (S735), the lower left front-side effect member 661 of the lower left-side effect device 600 moves to the left tiltable movable position even when an operation directed to the lower movable position of the upper left front-side effect member 761 is requested. When the upper left front side effect member 761 does not interfere with the lower left front side effect member 661, the process is skipped. Then, when the lower left front side effect member 661 is moved to the left side tilting movable position, processing for updating the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is started. Thereby, the left upper front side effect member 761 can be prevented from coming into contact with the lower left front side effect member 661.

  Next, a fifth role control process is executed (S736). In the fifth role control process (S 736), when the operation of the upper left rear effect member 721 of the upper left rendering device 700 is requested, the drive data of the upper left rear drive motor 703 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper left rear side drive motor 703 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), and the same as in the second part control process (S733) Processing can be performed. The upper left rear effect member 721 does not interfere with the other effect members when moving to the upper left rear movable position or the upper left rear initial position, so as to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Skipping of the process is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, the sixth part control process is executed (S737). In the sixth feature control process (S 737), when the operation of the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side rendering device 600 is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), for example, and similar to the case of the second role control process (S733) Processing can be performed. In the sixth character control process (S 737), even when requesting an operation of the lower left front side rendering member 661 toward the left standing initial position, the upper left front side rendering member 761 of the upper left side rendering device 700 is at the upper initial position. If the left lower front side effect member 661 does not interfere with the upper left front side effect member 761 when it is not moved, the process is skipped. Then, when the upper left front side effect member 761 moves to the upper initial position, processing of updating the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is started. Thereby, the left lower front side effect member 661 can be prevented from contacting the upper left front side effect member 761.

  Next, the seventh object control process is executed (S738). In the seventh role control process (S738), when requesting the operation of the lower left rear effect member 621 of the lower left rendering device 600, the drive data of the lower left rear drive motor 603 is updated. The drive pattern data of the lower left rear side drive motor 603 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), for example, and similar to the case of the second role control process (S733) Processing can be performed. The lower left rear effect member 621 does not interfere with the other effect members at the time of operation toward the lower left rear movable position or the lower left rear initial position, so as to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Skipping of the process is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, the eighth role control process is executed (S739). In the eighth role control process (S739), when the operation of the upper right rear effect member 851 of the right side rendering device 800 is requested, the drive data of the upper right rear driving motor 808 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper right back side drive motor 808 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), and is similar to the case of the second role control process (S733). Processing can be performed. The upper right rear effect member 851 does not interfere with the other effect members at the time of the operation directed to the upper right rear movable position or the upper right rear initial position, so as to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Skipping of the process is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, a ninth object control process is executed (S740). In the ninth feature control process (S740), when requesting the operation of the lower right rear effect member 831 of the right effect device 800, the drive data of the lower right rear drive motor 803 is updated. The drive pattern data of the lower right rear side drive motor 803 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), for example, and in the case of the second role control process (S733) Similar processing can be performed. In addition, since the lower right reverse effect member 831 does not interfere with the other effect members at the time of the operation directed to the lower right reverse side movable position or the lower right lower back initial position, interference based on the position information of the other effect members Skipping of the process for avoidance is not implemented. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, a tenth item control process is executed (S741). In the tenth feature control process (S741), when requesting the operation of the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800, a process of updating the drive data of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B, for example, and in the case of the second role control process (S733) Similar processing can be performed. In addition, since the lower right front side effect member 891 does not interfere with other effect members at the time of operation toward the right side tilting movable position or the right side standing initial position, interference avoidance based on position information of the other effect members Skipping of the process for is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, an eleventh role control process is executed (S742). In the eleventh character object control process (S742), when the operation of the first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 of the lower effect device 900 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 are requested Then, processing for updating the drive data of the movable support drive motor 904 is performed. The drive pattern data of the movable support drive motor 904 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), and in the case of the second part control process (S733) Similar processing can be performed. The first and second front movable support portions 951 and 961 and the first and second back movable support portions 921 and 931 have other effects when moving toward the lower movable position or the lower initial position. In order not to interfere with the member, skipping of the process for avoiding the interference based on the position information of the other rendering members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, a twelfth item control process is executed (S743). In the twelfth role control process (S 743), when the operation of the first and second front side effect members 97 1 and 98 1 of the lower side rendering device 900 is requested, the drive data of the front side drive motor 967 is updated. . The drive pattern data of the front side drive motor 967 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), and is similar to the case of the second gift control process (S733). Processing can be performed. The first and second front-side effect members 971 and 981 do not interfere with other effect members at the time of the operation directed to the first and second front-side movable positions or the first and second front-side initial positions. Skipping of the process for avoiding the interference based on the position information of the other rendering members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, a thirteenth object control process is executed (S744). In the thirteenth role control process (S744), when requesting the operation of the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower side rendering device 900, the process of updating the drive data of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is performed. Do. The drive pattern data of the reverse side rotation drive motor 934 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and (B), and is similar to the case of the second part control process (S733). Processing can be performed. The first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 do not interfere with other effect members at the time of operation toward the first and second back side movable positions or the first and second back side initial positions. Skipping of the process for avoiding the interference based on the position information of the other rendering members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Further, in the eleventh to thirteenth item control processes (S742 to S744), it is also possible to skip the process based on the position information of the other effect members. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 60 to FIG. 62, when the lower rendering device 900 performs the rendering operation, in the eleventh role control process (S742), the first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 and Even when requesting an operation toward the lower movable position of the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931, if another effect member that may interfere is not moved to the initial position, the effect Processing can be skipped to avoid interference with the components. In the twelfth object control process (S743), even when requesting the operation of the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 toward the first and second front side movable positions, the first and second front side movable support portions When 951 and 961 and the first and second back movable support portions 921 and 931 are not moved to the lower movable position, the processing can be skipped to improve the appearance of the rendering operation. In the thirteenth character control process (S744), even when requesting the movement toward the first and second back side movable positions of the first and second back side effect members 941, 946, the first and second front side effect members 971 , 981 are not moved to the first and second front side movable positions, the process can be skipped to improve the appearance of the rendering operation.

  Also, for example, when the lower effect device 900 performs an initial position return operation reverse to the above-described effect operation, in the twelfth role control process (S743), the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 are And when requesting an operation directed to the second front side initial position, when the first and second rear side rendering members 941 and 946 have not moved to the first and second rear side initial positions, the appearance of the initial position return operation is It is possible to skip the process to improve. In the eleventh item control process (S742), when requesting operation toward the lower initial position of the first and second front movable supports 951, 961 and the first and second rear movable supports 921, 931 However, when the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 are not moved to the first and second front side initial positions, the process can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the initial position return operation.

  Next, an electrical limit determination process is performed (S745). In the electrical limit determination process (S745), the output of the operation pulse is set in the interrupt process in the first to thirteenth item control processes (S732) to (S734) described above. It is determined whether the total value exceeds a predetermined regulated current value. In the present embodiment, there is a drive pattern for moving a plurality of part of the effect members at the same time among the plurality of effect members of each effect device.

  The table in FIG. 113 shows an example of a simultaneous drive pattern in which a plurality of drive motors of each effect device can simultaneously move corresponding effect members. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 113, there are first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. Circles in the table of FIG. 113 indicate drive motors operating in the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. For example, the first simultaneous driving pattern is the upper left rear driving motor 703 of the upper left rendering device 700, the lower left rear driving motor 603 of the lower left rendering device 600, the upper right rear driving motor 808 of the right rendering device 800 and the lower right rear. The second simultaneous drive pattern shows the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper effect drive motor 538 of the upper rendering device 500, and the upper left back drive motor of the upper left effect device 700. 703, a simultaneous drive pattern in which the lower left rear side drive motor 603 of the lower left side rendering device 600 operates is shown. For example, the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern includes the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper effect drive motor 538 of the upper rendering device 500, the movable support drive motor 904 of the lower rendering device 900, the front drive motor 967, and The simultaneous drive pattern which the back side rotation drive motor 934 operate | moves is shown.

  The table in FIG. 112 shows the relationship between the consumption current value of the drive motor and the regulated current value in each of the rendering devices. The power supplies shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicate the power supplies of the respective drive motors. The upper support drive motor 505, the upper effect drive motor 538, and the display drive motor 534 of the upper rendering device 500 operate using the power supplied from the first 12 V power supply G1 provided on the power supply substrate 450. Do. The upper left front side drive motor 737 and the upper left rear side drive motor 703 of the upper left rendering device 700 also operate using power supplied from the first 12 V power source G1. The lower left front side drive motor 637 and the lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side rendering device 600 also operate using the power supplied from the first 12 V power source G1. The upper right rear drive motor 808, the lower right rear drive motor 803, and the lower right front drive motor 867 of the right rendering device 800 also operate using the power supplied from the first 12V power source G1. The movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 of the lower rendering device 900 operate using the power supplied from the second 12 V power supply G2 provided on the power supply substrate 450. .

  The priority shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicates the priority when operating each drive motor. The priority order is, for example, as shown in the table of FIG. 112, the order of the drive motors corresponding to the above-described first to thirteenth object control processes (S732) to (S734) (upper support drive motor 505, upper effect Drive motor 538, display drive motor 534, upper left front drive motor 737, upper left rear drive motor 703, lower left front drive motor 637, lower left rear drive motor 603, upper right rear drive motor 808, lower right rear drive motor 803, lower right The front side drive motor 867, the movable support drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 can be set in this order.

  In the table of FIG. 112, the consumption current value of the upper support driving motor 505 of the upper rendering device 500 is H1, the consumption current of the upper rendering driving motor 538 is H2, and the consumption current of the display driving motor 534 is H3. I assume. The consumption current value of the upper left front side drive motor 737 of the left upper rendering device 700 is H4, and the consumption current value of the upper left rear side drive motor 703 is H5. The consumption current value of the lower left front side drive motor 637 of the lower left side rendering device 600 is H6, and the consumption current value of the lower left rear side drive motor 603 is H7. The consumption current value of the upper right rear side drive motor 808 of the right side rendering device 800 is H8, the consumption current value of the lower right rear side drive motor 803 is H9, and the consumption current value of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is H10. The consumption current value of the movable support drive motor 904 of the lower rendering device 900 is H11, the consumption current value of the front side drive motor 967 is H12, and the consumption current value of the rear side rotation drive motor 934 is H13. The consumption current values H1 to H13 of the respective drive motors are approximately 0.4 [A] to 1.8 [A].

  The regulated current value is set for each power supply of each drive motor. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 112, a drive motor (the upper support drive motor 505, the upper effect drive motor 538, the display drive motor 534, the upper left front drive motor 737, the upper left back) The first regulated current value HL1 for the drive motor 703, the lower left front drive motor 637, the lower left rear drive motor 603, the upper right rear drive motor 808, the lower right rear drive motor 803, and the lower right front drive motor 867) A second regulated current value HL2 is set for the drive motor (the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the reverse rotation drive motor 934) powered by the 12V power supply G2. In the present embodiment, in addition to the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, a total regulated current value HLA for all drive motors is set. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 are set to, for example, 5.0 [A]. The total regulated current value HLA is set to, for example, 6.0 [A]. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 may be set to different current values. Further, the total regulated current value HLA is larger than the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, and smaller than the sum of the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2. It may be set.

  In the example shown in the tables of FIGS. 112 and 113, for example, as in the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern, the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper effect drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, and the lower effect device 900. A process in the case where the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the reverse rotation drive motor 934 are simultaneously driven will be described. In this case, it is determined whether the total value of the consumption current of the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper effect drive motor 538 for which the output of the operation pulse is set in the interrupt processing this time exceeds the first regulated current value HL1. Do. When the total value of the consumed current exceeds the first regulated current value HL1, the drive motor having the higher priority of the upper support drive motor 505 and the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is provided in the range not exceeding the first regulated current value HL1. Set the operation pulse output of. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor with another low priority is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is performed to read from the save buffer and set it preferentially.

  In addition, whether the total value of the consumption current of the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the rear rotation drive motor 934 for which the output of the operation pulse is set in the interrupt processing exceeds the second regulated current value HL2 It is determined whether or not. If the total value of the consumption current exceeds the second regulated current value HL2, priority is given to the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the back side rotational drive motor 934 within the range not exceeding the second regulated current value HL2. Set the drive pulse output of the drive motor with the highest priority. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor with another low priority is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is performed to read from the save buffer and set it preferentially.

  Furthermore, the current consumption of the upper support drive motor 505, the upper effect drive motor 538, the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the reverse rotation drive motor 934 for which the output of the operation pulse is set in this interrupt processing It is determined whether or not the total value of 超 え る exceeds the total regulation current value HLA. If the total value of the consumed current exceeds the total regulated current value HLA, the upper support drive motor 505, the upper effect drive motor 538, the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive are used in a range not exceeding the total regulated current HLA. Of the motor 967 and the reverse side rotation drive motor 934, the output of the operation pulse of the drive motor having the higher priority is set. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor with another low priority is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is performed to read from the save buffer and set it preferentially.

  This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the drive motor from becoming unstable due to the total value of the consumption current of the drive motor becoming too large, so that the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized. Of the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns, also in the case of other simultaneous drive patterns, determination is performed for the first regulated current value HL1, the second regulated current value HL2, and the total regulated current value HLA, and the same applies. Can be processed. In addition, when the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor with low priority is stored in the save buffer, the processing of setting the priority of the low priority is performed by performing processing to set preferentially in the next interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent the operation of the rendering device from becoming irregular to the extent that it is not executed in the continuous interrupt processing but sensed by the player.

  Then, after the electrical limit determination process (S745), an error determination process is performed (S746). In this error determination processing (S746), determination processing of step number over error, determination processing of position check error, and determination processing of time monitoring check error are performed. In the determination process of the step number over error, the position detection sensor does not detect that the effect member of each effect device is positioned at the initial position, the movable position, or the intermediate position, and the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor (step It is determined whether (number) exceeds the error determination value. If the count value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor exceeds the error determination value, it is determined that the step number over error. As described above, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position is an initial value (for example, a value of zero) when the effect member is positioned at the initial position. The values are reset to different values when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse. Thus, the reference position at the time of counting the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error judgment value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, the determination of the step number over error can be performed accurately, and the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized. Since each operation table shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 includes a processing table in which the number of steps is indefinite until the position detection sensor is switched to the detection state, a situation where the position detection sensor is not detected (step out of the drive motor, When the effect member does not operate due to a mechanical trouble), the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is updated without switching from the processing table in which the number of steps is indefinite. Therefore, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor can be used as the determination value of the abnormal operation, and it is not necessary to separately provide a counter for measuring time for determination of timeout. If there is a possibility of using an operation table that does not include the processing table with an indefinite number of steps, the operation of the effect member ends even if an abnormal state occurs, so separately for each position detection sensor It is preferable to provide a timer (clock counter) for monitoring on / off.

  In the case of the first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 108, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for six error determination sections K1 to K6. The first error determination section K1 is a section from an intermediate position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts light shielding of the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The second error determination section K2 is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor to the start of light shielding of the light receiving section of the intermediate position sensor by the sensor detection section. The third error determination section K3 is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The fourth error determination section K4 is a section from an intermediate position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor. The fifth error determination section K5 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to the start of light shielding of the light receiving section of the intermediate position sensor by the sensor detection section. The sixth error determination section K6 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to the start of light shielding of the light receiving section of the initial position sensor by the sensor detection section.

  The error determination values ES1 to ES6 corresponding to the first to sixth error determination sections K1 to K6 are expressed by the following equations (1) to (6). In addition, coefficient (alpha) in following Formula (1)-(6) is set to the numerical value (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly difference etc. of each presentation apparatus.

ES1 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + (SP5 + SP6) × α (1)
ES2 = (SP2 + SP3) × α (2)
ES3 = (SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6) × α (3)
ES4 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4- (SP3 + SP4) × α (4)
ES5 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
− (SP6 + SP7) × α (5)
ES6 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
− (SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7) × α (6)

  In the case of the second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 109, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for two error determination sections K11 to K12. The seventh error determination section K11 is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The eighth error determination section K12 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to the start of light shielding of the light receiving section of the initial position sensor by the sensor detection section.

  The error determination values ES12 to ES12 corresponding to the seventh to eighth error determination sections K11 to K12 are expressed by the following equations (7) to (8). In addition, coefficient (alpha) 1 in following Formula (7)-(8) is set to the numerical value (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly difference etc. of each presentation apparatus.

ES11 = (SP12 + SP13) × α1 (7)
ES12 = SP12 + SP13 + SP14
− (SP13 + SP14) × α1 (8)

  In addition, coefficient (alpha) in Formula (1)-(6) and coefficient (alpha) 1 in Formula (7)-(8) may be suitably set to a different numerical value according to the structure of the presentation member which a drive motor moves. Further, the coefficient α in the equations (1) to (6) and the coefficient α1 in the equations (7) to (8) are, for example, according to the difference in the load of the drive motor due to gravity when the effect member moves up and down. It may be set to a different value depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor.

  In the position check error determination process, it is determined whether or not the effect member of each effect device is positioned at the initial position at the timing of the turning point of the game. In addition, with the timing of the turning point of the game, the timing of the customer waiting demonstration, the timing when it became a big hit in the first or second special symbol lottery, the timing of variation start of the decoration symbol, the timing of variation end of the decoration symbol It is When the effect member of each effect device is not positioned at the initial position at the timing of the turning point of the game, it is determined that a position check error has occurred. In the time monitoring check error determination process, when the effect member is located at the initial position for control (when the operation request is not made), the state of the position detection sensor corresponding to the effect member is a predetermined monitoring time (for example, It is determined whether or not it is in the non-detection state for 5 seconds or more. If the state of the position detection sensor is in the non-detection state for a predetermined monitoring time or more, it is determined that a time monitoring check error occurs.

[Error return processing, etc.]
If it is determined in the above-described error determination process (S746) that the number of steps is greater than an error, a position check error, or a time monitoring check error, error recovery processing corresponding to each error is executed. In the present embodiment, the error recovery process and the process are shared in the initialization operation process at power-on of the rendering device. Therefore, initialization operation processing at the time of power supply activation regarding the rendering device and error recovery processing corresponding to each error will be described.

<< Initialization operation processing at power on>
First, the initialization operation processing at the time of power activation for the rendering device will be briefly described. FIG. 101A is a flowchart showing an outline of initialization operation processing at power-on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on, an initial position return process is executed (S751). In this initial position return process, control for returning the effect members of each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right effect device 800, and lower effect device 900) to the initial position is performed. Do. The details of the initial position return process (S751) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Then, after the initial position return process (S751) is performed, a role-of-goods initialization process is performed (S752). In the accessory initialization process, control is performed to move the effect members of each effect device within the maximum movable range (the range between the initial position and the movable position). The details of the role initialization process (S752) will be described later with reference to FIG. If the initialization operation process at power-on has failed 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, and all drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and processing for transitioning to a state where requests for operation patterns are not received is performed. At the same time, image display by the effect display device 95, voice notification by the speaker 8, and lighting of the effect lamp LP perform external notification indicating that the effect device is abnormal.

<< Error return processing for step number over error >>
Next, error recovery processing when the number of steps is over error will be briefly described. FIG. 101 (B) is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing when the number of steps is over error. If it is determined in the above-described error determination process (S746) that the step number is exceeded, an initial position return process is executed (S756). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power on.

  Then, after the initial position return process (S756) is executed, a role and character initialization process is executed (S757). In addition to performing control of moving the effect member of the effect device determined to be the step number over error within the maximum movable range (range between the initial position and the movable position), the role initialization process is performed at power on. This process is the same as the item initialization process (S752) executed in the initialization operation process. If the error recovery process at the time of step number over error fails consecutively multiple times (for example, three times), it is determined as a motor error, and all drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and a request for operation pattern is issued. Perform processing to shift to the non-acceptance state. However, before the request is not received, the drive motor is controlled so as to move the effect member toward the initial position (determined as the step number over error) regardless of the detection state of the position detection sensor. For example, the presentation member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the presentation display device 95 is small, and the presentation member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the presentation display device 95 to prevent visibility. An operation request of fixed step operation (not operation using a position detection sensor) is issued to the motor. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the effect display device 95 from being disturbed by the effect member when an error of step number over occurs.

  Among the operations directed to the initial position of the effect member, the operations directed to the movable position of the effect member, or the operation directed to the intermediate position of the effect member as the operation request of the fixed step operation for the drive motor, the effect display device 95 An operation request may be made to a position that does not most disturb the visibility of the. The operation request of such fixed step operation is a mode in which an operation request is performed for a rendering member that is not completed even if error recovery processing is repeated, or when a plurality of rendering members are in an abnormal state, one of the plurality of rendering members In order to complete the error recovery process on the effect member, the aspect in which the operation request is made for the other effect members can be considered. Moreover, since the step number over error may be an abnormality during the game, the abnormality notification to the outside is more conservative than the abnormality notification performed at the time of initialization operation processing at the time of power activation. , It is desirable to secure the visibility etc. of the fluctuation effect.

<< Error return process at position check error >>
Next, error return processing at the time of position check error will be briefly described. FIG. 101C is a flowchart showing an outline of error return processing at the time of position check error. If it is determined in the above-described error determination process (S746) that a position check error has occurred, an initial position return process is executed (S761). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power on. If error recovery processing at the time of position check error fails 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, and all drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and processing for transitioning to a state where requests for motion patterns are not received is performed. The image display by the effect display device 95, the sound notification by the speaker 8, and the lighting of the effect lamp LP perform an external notification indicating that the effect device is abnormal.

<< Error recovery process at time monitoring check error >>
Next, error recovery processing at the time of time monitoring check error will be briefly described. FIG. 101D is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing at the time of a time monitoring check error. If it is determined in the above-mentioned error determination process (S746) that a time monitoring check error has occurred, an initial position return process is executed (S766). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power on. If the error recovery process at the time monitoring check error fails 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, and all drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and processing for transitioning to a state where requests for operation patterns are not received is performed. At the same time, image display by the effect display device 95, voice notification by the speaker 8, and lighting of the effect lamp LP perform external notification indicating that the effect device is abnormal.

(Initial position return process)
Next, the initial position return process (S751) will be described. 102 to 104 are flowcharts showing the details of the initial position return processing (S751).

  First, an all-off character stop process is executed (S771). In this all-services stop processing (S771), control for temporarily stopping all the effect members in each of the rendering devices, that is, a stop request is performed on the drive motor related to the all-services operation.

  Next, the upper left front side effect member return process is executed (S772). In the upper left front side effect member feedback process (S772), control is performed to return the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 to the upper initial position. If the upper left front-side effect member 761 is already at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the lower left front-side effect member feedback process is executed (S773). In the lower left front side effect member feedback process (S773), control is performed to return the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 to the left standing initial position. If the lower left front-side effect member 661 is already at the left standing initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, front and back side effect member return processing is executed (S774). In the front and back side rendering member feedback processing (S774), control is performed to return the first and second front side rendering members 971 and 981 of the lower side rendering device 900 to the first and second front side initial positions. If the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 are already at the first and second front side initial positions, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower effect device 900 to the first and second back side initial positions. This process is skipped when the 1st and 2nd back side effect members 941 and 946 are already located in the 1st and 2nd back side initial position.

  Next, movable support feedback processing is performed (S775). In the movable support return processing (S775), control is performed to return the first and second back movable supports 921 and 931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 to the lower initial position. This process is skipped if the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 and the like are already at the lower initial position.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right effect device 800 is located at the right standing initial position (S776). In the first determination process (S776), when the lower right front-side effect member 891 is not located at the right-side standing initial position (S776: NO), the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 of the upper effect device 500. Is determined to be at the upper initial position, the second upper effect member 581 is positioned at the close initial position, and the sub display 561 is positioned at the rotation initial position (S777). In the second determination process (S777), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial position, the second upper effect member 581 is located at the close initial position, and the sub display 561 is When it is located at the rotation initial position (S777: YES), the process moves to the lower right front side effect member feedback process (S781).

  On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531, the second upper effect member 581, and the sub display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S777: NO), the sub display device It shifts to operation processing (S778). In this sub-display operation process (S778), control is performed to turn the sub-display device 561 toward the rotation initial position by the fixing step operation.

  Next, the second upper effect member feedback process is executed (S779). In the second upper effect member feedback process (S779), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the proximity initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already at the proximity initial position, this process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the upper support portion feedback processing is executed (S780), and the process shifts to the lower right front side effect member feedback processing (S781). In the upper support portion feedback process (S780), control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial position. If the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 are already at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

  In the lower right front-side effect member feedback processing (S781), control is performed to return the lower-right front-side effect member 891 of the right-side effect device 800 to the right-side standing initial position. If the lower-right front-side effect member 891 is already at the right-side standing initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are located at the upper initial position and the secondary display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782). In the first determination process (S776) described above, when the lower right front-side effect member 891 is located at the right standing initial position (S776: YES), the above-described second determination process (S777), the sub display device The third determination process (S782) is skipped by skipping the operation process (S778), the second upper effect member feedback process (S779), the upper support portion feedback process (S780), and the lower right front side effect member feedback process (S781). Migrate to In the third determination process (S782), when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial position and the sub display 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782: YES), The process shifts to (second) second upper effect member feedback processing (S789).

  On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 and the sub display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S 782: NO), the second upper effect member movable processing (S 783) Transition. In the second upper effect member moving process (S783), control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separated movable position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already at the separation movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the second upper effect member holding process is executed (S784). In the second upper effect member holding process (S784), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separation movable position, the second upper effect member 581 (by the upper effect portion drive motor 538) Control is performed to perform the excitation holding operation.

  Next, the upper support operation process is performed (S785). In the upper support portion operation process (S785), when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are positioned at the upper movable position, the (first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 Control is performed to perform the pressing operation in the direction exceeding the upper movable position. If the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 are not located at the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the upper support moving process is executed (S786). In the upper support portion movable process (S 786), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. If the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 are already at the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the secondary display device movement process is executed (S787). In the sub display device movement processing (S 787), control is performed to rotationally move the sub display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 to the rotation movable position. If the sub display device 561 is already at the rotation movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the sub display device feedback processing is executed (S788), and the process shifts to the (second) second upper effect member feedback processing (S789). In this sub-display device feedback process (S788), control is performed to return the sub-display device 561 of the upper rendering device 500 to the rotation initial position. If the secondary display device 561 is already at the rotation initial position, this process is skipped.

  In the (second) second upper effect member feedback process (S 789), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the proximity initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already at the proximity initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, a (second) second upper effect member holding process is executed (S790). In the (second) second upper effect member holding process (S 790), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separation movable position, the (upper effect portion of the second upper effect member 581 Control for performing the excitation holding operation by the drive motor 538 is performed.

  Next, the (second) upper support return processing is executed (S791). In the (second) upper support return processing (S791), control is performed to return the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial position. If the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 are already at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

  And a back side presentation member return processing is performed (S792). In this back side rendering member feedback process (S792), control is performed to return the upper left back side rendering member 721 of the upper left side rendering device 700 to the upper left back side initial position. If the upper left back side rendering member 721 is already at the upper left back initial position, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the lower left rear effect member 621 of the lower left rendering device 600 to the lower left rear initial position. If the lower left rear effect member 621 is already at the lower left rear initial position, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the upper right rear movable member 841 of the right rendering device 800 to the upper right rear initial position. If the upper right back movable member 841 is already at the upper right back initial position, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the lower right rear effect member 831 of the right rendering device 800 to the lower right initial position. If the lower right rear effect member 831 is already at the lower right lower initial position, this process is skipped.

(Rolls initialization process)
Next, the item initialization process (S752) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the details of the bonus item initialization process (S752).

  First, back side effect member initialization operation processing is executed (S801). In this back side rendering member initialization operation processing (S801), control is performed to move the upper left back directing member 721 of the upper left side rendering device 700 within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper left back initial position and the upper left back movable position). Further, control is performed to move the lower left rear effect member 621 of the lower left rendering device 600 within the maximum movable range (a range between the lower left initial position and the lower left rear movable position). Further, control is performed to move the upper right rear movable member 841 of the right rendering device 800 within the maximum movable range (a range between the upper right rear initial position and the upper right rear movable position). Further, control is performed to move the lower right rear side rendering member 831 of the right side rendering device 800 within the maximum movable range (a range between the lower right rear side initial position and the lower right rear side movable position).

  Next, the lower right front-side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S802). In this lower right front side effect member initialization operation process (S802), control to move the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800 within the maximum movable range (the range between the right standing initial position and the right tilt movable position) I do.

  Next, the upper left front-side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S803). In this upper left front side rendering member initialization operation process (S 803), the possibility that the upper left front side rendering member 761 of the upper left side rendering device 700 may interfere with the lower left front side rendering member 661 of the lower left side rendering device 600 during the confirmation operation Control to move the left lower front side effect member 661 to the left tiltable movable position, and then move the upper left front side effect member 761 within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper initial position and the lower movable position). I do.

  Next, the lower left front side effect member return process is executed (S804). In the lower left front side effect member feedback processing (S804), control is performed to return the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 from the left side tilting movable position to the left side standing initial position. The lower left front-side effect member 661 is rockingly displaced to the left-side tilting movable position in the above-mentioned upper-left front-side rendering member initialization operation processing (S803), so the maximum movable range (left standing initial position and left-side tilting movable position Only the operation to return to the left standing initial position among the operations in the range By executing the upper left front side effect member initialization operation process (S803) and the lower left front side effect member feedback process (S804), the process is replaced with the initialization operation process of the lower left front side effect member 661.

  Next, the upper effect member moving process is executed (S805). In the upper effect member moving process (S805), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. Further, control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separation movable position.

  Next, the secondary display device initialization operation process is executed (S806). In the sub display device initialization operation process (S806), control is performed to perform the excitation holding operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500. Further, control is performed to rotate the sub display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 between the rotation initial position and the rotation movable position to return the rotation initial position.

  Next, the upper effect member feedback process is executed (S807). In the upper effect member feedback processing (S 807), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the separation movable position to the proximity initial position. Further, control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper movable position to the upper initial position.

  Next, movable support movement processing is performed (S808). In this movable support portion movable process (S 808), control is performed to move the first and second back movable support portions 921, 931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 to the lower movable position.

  Next, front and back side effect member initialization operation processing is executed (S809). In this front and back side rendering member initialization operation processing (S809), the excitation holding operation of the first and second back movable support portions 921, 931, etc. moved to the lower movable position (by the movable support portion drive motor 904) is performed Control. Also, control to move the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 of the lower side rendering device 900 within the maximum movable range (the range between the first and second front side initial positions and the first and second front side movable positions) I do. Also, control to move the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower side rendering device 900 within the maximum movable range (the range between the first and second back side initial positions and the first and second back side movable positions) I do.

  Then, movable support feedback processing is executed (S810). In this movable support return processing (S810), control is performed to return the first and second back movable supports 921 and 931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 from the lower movable position to the lower initial position. Since the first and second back side movable supports 921, 931, etc. are moved to the lower movable position in the previous movable support movable process (S808), the maximum movable range (lower initial position and lower movable position) Of the operation in the range between (1) and (2). By executing the movable support moving process (S808) and the movable support returning process (S810), the process is replaced with the initialization operation process of the first and second back movable supports 921, 931 and the like.

[Feature configuration in the present embodiment]
[Feature configuration of upper stage rendering device]
In the present embodiment, when the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position by the upper effect portion drive motor 538 or the like of the upper effect device 500, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member when viewed from the front. When the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the separation movable position by the upper effect drive motor 538 or the like, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 571 are placed. The screen 561a of the sub display device 561 can be viewed from the front through the gap with the upper effect member 581. As a result, the secondary display device 561 is made to appear from the rear of the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen 561a of the secondary display device 561. It will be possible to

  Also, with the second upper support member 531 moved to the separation movable position by the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 or the like, the sub display device 561 is rotated along the plane including the screen 561 a in the second upper support portion 531. A display drive motor 534 or the like is provided. As a result, the secondary display device 561 appears from the rear of the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581, and the secondary display device 561 is rotated by the display drive motor 534 or the like, which is surprising. It will be possible to perform various effects.

  In addition, the upper initial position where the second upper effect member 581 moves to the close initial position by the upper effect drive motor 538 and the like, and the second upper effect member 581 by the upper effect drive motor 538 the close initial position and the separation movable position An upper base portion 501 is provided for movably supporting the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 between the upper rendering position where the upper base portion 501 moves. Then, as the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 move relative to the upper base portion 501, the first upper effect member 571 is displaceable in the direction away from the second upper effect member 581. . Thus, the first upper rendering member 571 and the second upper rendering member 581 supported by the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are integrated in a state in which they are in close proximity to each other from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position. It is possible to move variously, or to separate from each other between the upper middle position and the upper presentation position, and it is possible to perform various presentation.

[Feature configuration of lower left side rendering device and upper left side rendering device]
In the present embodiment, the lower left rendering device 600 includes a left standing initial position in which the lower left front rendering member 661 extends vertically, and a left tilting movable position in which the lower left front directing member 661 is inclined leftward from the left standing initial position. The left lower front side drive motor 637 etc. for displacing the lower left front side effect member 661 is provided, and the upper left front side effect member 761 is located in the upper left side effect device 700 near the upper left of the left lower front side effect member 661 at the left standing initial position. An upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like for moving the upper left front side effect member 761 is provided at an upper initial position extending vertically and a lower movable position below the upper initial position. The upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like moves the upper left front side presentation member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 is displaced to the left tilting movable position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 or the like. When the upper left front-side effect member 761 is moved to the lower movable position by the upper left front-side drive motor 737 or the like, the upper left front-side effect member 761 is configured to be located above the lower left front-side effect member 661 displaced to the left tilt movable position.

  Accordingly, when the upper left front-side effect member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position, the upper left front-side effect member 761 is positioned in the upper vicinity of the lower left front-side effect member 661 displaced from the left standing initial position to the left tilt movable position. Therefore, if an integral rendering member extending in the vertical direction is formed by the upper left front side rendering member 761 in the upper initial position and the lower left front side rendering member 661 in the left standing initial position, the upper left front side rendering member 761 It is possible to perform such an effect that the integral effect member including the lower left front side effect member 661 collapses, and it becomes possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. The upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like moves the upper left front side effect member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 is displaced to the left tilting movable position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 or the like. It is possible. Therefore, it can prevent that the upper left front side effect member 761 abuts on the lower left front side effect member 661, and can prevent the lower left side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 from being broken.

  The upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like are configured to move the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction to the left movable position from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while inclining leftward. As such, by making the movement of the upper left front side effect member 761 complicated, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Feature configuration of lower side rendering device]
In the present embodiment, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 of the lower effect device 900 engage with the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 provided on the left and right sides of the first back side movable support portion 921. Has a left engaging hole 912 and a right engaging hole 917 in the form of long holes, and the first back movable support 921 etc. is vertically moved with respect to the lower base 901 by the movable support drive motor 904 etc. A left biasing spring that applies a biasing force in a direction in which the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 swing upward on the left and right sides of the lower base portion 901. 913 and a right biasing spring 918 are provided. In this way, even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved by the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921, The lateral displacement of the first back movable support 921 and the like due to vibration or the like is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and disengaging from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the failure of the lower effect device 900.

  In addition, when the first back side movable support portion 921 or the like moves to the lower side movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is at the tip end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911 The right engagement pin 927 abuts on the tip end of the right engagement hole 917 in the right arm member 916. Then, since the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 become more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are obtained when the first back side movable support 921 and the like are moved to the lower side movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates and moves, the displacement of the first back movable support 921 and the like in the left and right direction is effectively suppressed. In addition, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move upward beyond the lower movable position and are prevented from being detached from the lower base portion 901. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the failure of the lower rendering device 900 more reliably.

[Feature configuration of electrical restriction determination processing]
In the present embodiment, in the effect mode in which two or more drive motors among the plurality of drive motors (drive sources) of the respective rendering devices cause the corresponding rendering device to perform the rendering operation, consumption of the two or more driving motors When the total value of the current exceeds a predetermined regulated current value, the operation timing of the two or more drive motors is controlled such that the total value of the consumed current becomes equal to or less than the regulated current value. This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the drive motor from becoming unstable due to the total value of the consumption current of the drive motor becoming too large, so that the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized.

[Feature configuration of error judgment processing]
In this embodiment, when the effect member is at the initial position when the effect member moves to the detection position (the initial position, the intermediate position, and the detection position at the movable position) of the position detection sensor by the drive motor (stepping motor). To set the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the detected position as the initial value as the position information of the effect member (stored in the position information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260) Configured Thus, the reference position at the time of counting the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error judgment value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, the determination of the step number over error can be performed accurately, and the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized.

[Feature configuration of error return processing]
In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described error determination process (S746) that an error occurs over the number of steps, an error recovery process is performed when the number of steps exceeds the error, and the error recovery process is performed a plurality of times (for example, 3 times). 2.) If it fails continuously, the drive motor (drive means) is controlled to move the effect member toward the initial position. For example, the presentation member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the presentation display device 95 is small, and the presentation member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the presentation display device 95 to prevent visibility. An operation request of fixed step operation (not operation using a position detection sensor) is issued to the motor. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the effect display device 95 from being disturbed by the effect member when an error of step number over occurs.

[Feature configuration of operation table]
In the present embodiment, control of the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed based on the operation table including a plurality of processing tables, and the plurality of processing tables are processed when the operation pulse is transmitted to the drive motor a predetermined number of times. And a processing table whose processing ends when the effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, the detection position of the movable position sensor). Since the effect member can be reliably moved to the movable position or the like by the processing table which ends the process when the effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, the plurality of effect members can be moved smoothly without contact or the like. This makes it possible to stabilize the operation of the rendering device.

  For example, the control of the first drive motor (stepping motor) for moving the first effect member is performed based on the first operation table including a plurality of processing tables, and the plurality of processing tables are the predetermined number of times for the first drive motor. The processing table ends processing when the operation pulse is transmitted, and the processing table ends processing when the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, the detection position of the movable position sensor), When the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, control of a second drive motor (stepping motor) that moves the second effect member is started based on a second operation table including a plurality of processing tables. As a result, the first effect member can be reliably moved to the movable position or the like, so that the first and second effect members can be smoothly moved without contact, etc., and the operation of the effect device is stabilized. It will be possible to

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, a liquid crystal shutter or a light guide plate is provided on the rear surface side of the first light emission effect portion 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the rear surface side of the second light emission effect portion 582 of the second upper effect member 581. You may do so. By temporarily activating the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate to prevent visibility of the first light emitting effect portion 572 and the second light emitting effect portion 582 toward the rear (for the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561), During this time, the effect image displayed on the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 can be changed without being visually recognized by the player. Then, if the operation of the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate is stopped, it is possible to perform an effect of suddenly changing the light emission color and the like of the first light emitting effect portion 572 and the second light emitting effect portion 582.

  In the embodiment described above, the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95 is the information that is to be displayed on the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 when the effect operation of the sub display device 561 can not be performed due to a step number over error or the like. It may be displayed on the screen.

  In the above-described embodiment, the upper right front-side effect member 898 is fixedly arranged above the lower-right front-side effect member 891 of the right-side effect device 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the right-hand rendering apparatus 800, an upper initial position extending in the vertical direction and an upper initial position extending in the upper and lower direction below the upper initial position and an upper right front side rendering member 898 located in the upper right vicinity of the lower right front side rendering member 891 An upper right front side drive motor or the like for moving the upper right front side effect member 898 in the vertical direction may be provided at the movable position. In this case, with the upper right front side drive motor or the like, with the lower right front side effect member 891 displaced to the right tilt movable position by the lower right front side drive motor 867 etc. When the upper right front-side effect member 898 is moved to the lower movable position by the upper-right front-side drive motor or the like, the upper right front-side effect member 898 is positioned in the upper vicinity of the lower right front-side effect member 891 displaced to the right tilt movable position. Be done. Further, in this case, the upper right front side drive motor or the like is configured to move from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while inclining the upper right front side effect member 898 extending vertically to the right (or left). Thereby, the same effect as in the case of the lower left rendering device 600 and the upper left rendering device 700 can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like of the upper left side rendering device 700 is configured to move the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction to the left movable position and move it from the upper initial position to the lower movable position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction may be configured to be moved from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while being inclined rightward. The right guide hole 735 of the base portion 731 may be formed in a wave shape, and the upper left front side effect member 761 may be moved while swinging.

  Although the setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of a drive motor was demonstrated in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is not restricted to this. Therefore, a third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. In FIG. 114, when the effect member reciprocates, the relationship between the counter values of the operation pulse when the initial position sensor alone is provided (for example, the effect member which freely falls until it contacts the mechanical stopper portion) is schematically shown. Show. In FIG. 114, SP21 is the counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction exceeding the initial position) by the mechanical stopper. In SP22, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the rendering member reaches the initial position. number of steps). SP23 is the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor to when the effect member reaches the movable position (Number of steps). SP24 is the counter value (step number) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the movable position) by the mechanical stopper.

  The counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is the initial value (for example, a value of zero) when the effect member is positioned at the initial position. It is set to a different value. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value that is SP22. The counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is not set because the movable position sensor is not provided.

  In the case of the third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set in the ninth error determination section. The ninth error determination section is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to the start of light shielding of the light receiving section of the initial position sensor by the sensor detection section. The error determination value ES21 corresponding to the ninth error determination section is expressed by the following equation (9). In addition, coefficient (alpha) 2 in following Formula (9) is set to the numerical value (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly difference etc. of each presentation apparatus.

  ES21 = SP22 + SP23− (SP23) × α2 (9)

  Next, a fourth setting example of the counter value of the drive pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 115 schematically shows the relationship between the counter values of operation pulses when only the initial position sensor is provided when the effect member performs continuous rotational movement (such as a rotating reel). In FIG. 115, SP 31 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor at the reverse rotation of the drive motor until the rendering member reaches the initial position. The counter value (number of steps) of In SP32, the counter value of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts blocking the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor until the rendering member reaches the initial position. (Number of steps). SP33 corresponds to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit terminates light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during forward rotation of the drive motor (after one rotation) until light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor starts again. It is the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor.

  The counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is the initial value (for example, a value of zero) when the effect member is positioned at the initial position. It is set to a different value. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to (−SP 32). At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value (+ SP 31).

  In the case of the fourth setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set in the tenth to eleventh error determination sections. The tenth error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). The eleventh error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). The error determination values ES31 to ES32 corresponding to the tenth to eleventh error determination sections are expressed by the following equations (10) to (11). In addition, coefficient (alpha) 3 in following Formula (10)-(11) is set to the numerical value (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly difference etc. of each presentation apparatus.

ES31 = (SP31 + SP33) × α3 (10)
ES32 = − (SP32 + SP33) × α3 (11)

  Although the pachinko gaming machine has been exemplified and described as an example of the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied in the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, arrange balls, ball ball gaming machines, rotating bodies The same applies to a game machine (slot machine) and the like, and similar effects can be obtained.

PM Pachinko game machine PA game area 1 outer frame 2 front frame 50 game board 90 center decoration 95 effect display device (95a screen)
100 main control board 200 effect control board 500 upper effect device 501 upper base portion 505 upper support drive motor 506 upper support drive mechanism 516a upper initial position sensor 516b upper middle position sensor 516c upper movable position sensor 521 first upper support 531 Second upper support portion 533a Rotation initial position sensor 533b Rotation intermediate position sensor 534 Display drive motor 535 Rotation drive mechanism 538 Upper effect portion drive motor 539 Upper effect portion drive gear 551 Cover light emitting portion 553c Rotatable position sensor 558a Proximity initial position sensor 558c Separate movable position sensor 561 Secondary display unit (561a screen)
571 first upper effect member 572 first light emitting effect portion 581 second upper effect member 582 second light emitting effect portion 600 lower left side effect device 601 lower left back base portion 603 lower left back drive motor 604 lower left back drive gear 605a lower left back initial position sensor 605c lower left rear movable position sensor 621 lower left rear effect member 631 lower left front side base portion 636a left standing initial position sensor 636c left tilting movable position sensor 637 lower left front side drive motor 638 lower left front side drive mechanism 661 lower left front side rendering member 700 left upper rendering device 701 Top left back side base portion 703 Top left back side drive motor 705a Top left back side initial position sensor 705c Top left back side movable position sensor 721 Top left back side effect member 731 Top left front side base portion 736c Lower movable position sensor 737 Top left front side drive motor 738 Top left front side drive mechanism 7 1 upper left front side effect member 800 right side effect device 801 right back side base portion 803 lower right back drive motor 804 lower right back drive mechanism 805a lower right back initial position sensor 805 c lower right back movable position sensor 808 upper right back drive motor 809 upper right back drive gear 810a upper right rear initial position sensor 810c upper right rear movable position sensor 831 lower right rear directing member 851 upper right rear directing member 861 right front side base portion 866a right standing initial position sensor 866c right tilting movable position sensor 867 lower right front side drive motor 868 lower right Front side drive mechanism 891 Lower right Front side effect member 900 Lower side effect device 901 Lower base portion 904 Movable support portion drive motor 905 Movable support portion drive mechanism 908a Lower initial position sensor 908c Lower movable position sensor 911 Left arm member 912 Left engagement Joint hole 913 Left biasing spring 16 right arm member 917 right engagement hole 918 right biasing spring 921 first back side movable support portion 926 left engagement pin 927 right engagement pin 931 second back side movable support portion 934 back side rotation drive motor 935 back side rotation drive mechanism 936a 1 back side initial position sensor 936c first back side movable position sensor 941 first back side effect member 946 second back side effect member 951 first front side movable support portion 961 second front side movable support portion 967 front side drive motor 968 front side drive mechanism 969a first front side Initial position sensor 969c Front side movable position sensor 971 Front side effect member 981 Front side effect member

Claims (1)

A rendering device that performs a predetermined rendering operation;
And effect control means for controlling the effect device.
The effect device is
An effect member capable of moving between an initial position and an effect position where the effect operation is performed;
A stepping motor for moving the effect member;
Position detection means for detecting that the effect member has moved to a predetermined detection position between the initial position and the effect position;
The effect control means has a position information storage area for storing position information of the effect member,
When the position detection means detects that the effect member has moved to the detection position by the stepping motor, the stepping corresponding to the detection position takes as an initial value the case where the effect member is positioned at the initial position the counter value of the design of the operation pulses of the motor, is configured to set as the position information of the presentation member moved to the detection position stored in the position information storage area,
In the position information storage area, the counter value of the operation pulse of the stepping motor is stored,
The counter value of the operation pulse of the stepping motor stored in the position information storage area is added according to the operation pulse of the stepping motor that moves the effect member to one side between the initial position and the effect position. The subtraction is performed according to the operation pulse of the stepping motor that moves the effect member to the other side between the initial position and the effect position .
The gaming counter is characterized in that the designed counter value is different depending on the direction in which the effect member of the stepping motor is moved when the position detection means detects that the effect member has moved to the detection position. .

Images